Reference Manual

Original Instructions

Rockwell Automation Library of Process Objects:

Display Elements
Version 4.0
Important User Information
Read this document and the documents listed in the additional resources section about installation, configuration, and
operation of this equipment before you install, configure, operate, or maintain this product. Users are required to
familiarize themselves with installation and wiring instructions in addition to requirements of all applicable codes, laws,
and standards.

Activities including installation, adjustments, putting into service, use, assembly, disassembly, and maintenance are
required to be carried out by suitably trained personnel in accordance with applicable code of practice.

If this equipment is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by the equipment may
be impaired.

In no event will Rockwell Automation, Inc. be responsible or liable for indirect or consequential damages resulting from
the use or application of this equipment.

The examples and diagrams in this manual are included solely for illustrative purposes. Because of the many variables and
requirements associated with any particular installation, Rockwell Automation, Inc. cannot assume responsibility or
liability for actual use based on the examples and diagrams.

No patent liability is assumed by Rockwell Automation, Inc. with respect to use of information, circuits, equipment, or
software described in this manual.

Reproduction of the contents of this manual, in whole or in part, without written permission of Rockwell Automation,
Inc., is prohibited

Throughout this manual, when necessary, we use notes to make you aware of safety considerations.

WARNING: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can cause an explosion in a hazardous
environment, which may lead to personal injury or death, property damage, or economic loss.

ATTENTION: Identifies information about practices or circumstances that can lead to personal injury or death, property
damage, or economic loss. Attentions help you identify a hazard, avoid a hazard, and recognize the consequence.

IMPORTANT Identifies information that is critical for successful application and understanding of the product.

Labels may also be on or inside the equipment to provide specific precautions.

SHOCK HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that dangerous
voltage may be present.

BURN HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a drive or motor, to alert people that surfaces may
reach dangerous temperatures.

ARC FLASH HAZARD: Labels may be on or inside the equipment, for example, a motor control center, to alert people to
potential Arc Flash. Arc Flash will cause severe injury or death. Wear proper Personal Protective Equipment (PPE). Follow ALL
Regulatory requirements for safe work practices and for Personal Protective Equipment (PPE).
 Table of Contents

Preface
Additional Resources . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13

Chapter 1
Overview Required Files. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Basic Attributes and Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
State Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Status/Quality Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Threshold Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Deviation Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Command Source Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Maintenance Bypass Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Basic Faceplate Attributes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Quick Display Interaction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Using a Display Element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32

Chapter 2
Cross Functional Family Condition Gate Delay (P_Gate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
Faceplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Interlocks with First Out and Bypass (P_Intlk) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Permissives with Bypass (P_Perm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Central Reset (P_Reset) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Command Source (P_CmdSrc) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56
Command Source Totem Pole. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Operator Buttons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Maintenance Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Advanced Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Operator Prompt (P_Prompt) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Graphic Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
Faceplates. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Boolean Logic with Snapshot (P_Logic). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
View Snapshot Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 3

Table of Contents

Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Gate Configuration Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Chapter 3
I/O Processing Family Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Trends Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Basic Analog Input (P_AIn). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Operator (Home) Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Advanced Analog Input (P_AInAdv) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
Analog Input Channel (P_AIChan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Dual Sensor Analog Input (P_AInDual) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Multiple Analog Input (P_AInMulti). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Discrete Input (P_DIn). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Discrete Output (P_DOut) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

4 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Table of Contents

Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Analog Output (P_AOut) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
Pressure/Temperature Compensated Flow (P_PTComp) . . . . . . . 138
Tank Strapping Table (P_StrapTbl) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

Chapter 4
Regulatory and Procedural Proportional + Integral + Derivative Enhanced (P_PIDE). . . . . . . 140
Control Family Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Operator (Home) Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Advanced Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Trends. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Analog Fanout (P_Fanout) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Engineering Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
High or Low Selector (P_HiLoSel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Engineering Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Deadband Controller (P_DBC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 5

Table of Contents

Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180

Engineering Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Rockwell Automation Sequencer Object (P_Seq) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Engineering Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Dosing (P_Dose). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Engineering Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Lead/Lag/Standby Motor Group (P_LLS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Engineering Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Motor Configuration Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

Chapter 5
Motors Family Common Motors Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
Single-speed Motor (P_Motor). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Display Elements (P_Motor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227
Two-speed Motor (P_Motor2Spd) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Display Elements (P_Motor2Spd) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

6 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Table of Contents

Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Reversing Motor (P_MotorRev). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Display Elements (P_MotorRev) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Hand-operated Motor (P_MotorHO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Display Elements (P_MotorHO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Engineering Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Discrete 2-, 3-, 4-state Device (P_D4SD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Display Elements (P_D4SD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Engineering Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Variable Speed Drive (P_VSD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Display Elements (P_VSD). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Engineering Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 277
PowerFlex® 523/525 Variable Frequency Drives (P_PF52x). . . . . . 278
Display Elements (P_PF52x) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 7

Table of Contents

Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281

Engineering Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Trends Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
PowerFlex 753 Drive (P_PF753) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Display Elements (P_PF753) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Engineering Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Trends Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
PowerFlex 755 Drive (P_PF755) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Display Elements (P_PF755) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Engineering Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
Trends Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306
SMC™-50 Smart Motor Controller (P_SMC50) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Display Elements (P_SMC50). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311
Engineering Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
SMC Flex Smart Motor Controller (P_SMCFlex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Engineering Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322

8 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Table of Contents

E1 Plus™ Electronic Overload Relay (EtherNet/IP) (P_E1PlusE) . 323

Display Elements (EtherNet/IP) (P_E1PlusE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Engineering Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
E3/E3 Plus Overload Relay (P_E3Ovld) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Engineering Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
E300™ Electronic Overload Relay (EtherNet/IP) (P_E300Ovld) . 336
Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Engineering Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Run Time and Start Counter (P_RunTime). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Restart Inhibit for Large Motor (P_ResInh) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349

Chapter 6
Valves Family Common Valves Faceplates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Analog/Pulsed Control Valve (P_ValveC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 9

Table of Contents

Engineering Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Hand-operated Valve (P_ValveHO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Engineering Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Motor-operated Valve (P_ValveMO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 374
Engineering Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Mix-proof Valve (P_ValveMP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
Solenoid-operated Valve (P_ValveSO) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 388
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391
Engineering Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
2-state Valve Statistics (P_ValveStats). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

10 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Table of Contents

Engineering Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 398

HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 399
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
n-Position Device (P_nPos) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Advanced Properties Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Advanced Maintenance Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Engineering Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
HMI Configuration Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Alarms Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 412
Discrete 2-, 3-, 4-state Device (P_D4SD) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

Chapter 7
Built-in Instructions Family Proportional + Integral + Derivative Enhanced (PIDE) Autotune 415
Autotune Page 1. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Autotune Page 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417
Autotune Page 3. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
Coordinated Control (CC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Advanced Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Trends Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 429
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 431
Coordinated Control (CC) Autotune. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432
Internal Model Control (IMC). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 435
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
Advanced Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
Trends Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
Internal Model Control (IMC) Autotune . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
Modular Multivariable Control (MMC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Advanced Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Trends Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467
Proportional + Integral + Derivative Enhanced (PIDE) . . . . . . . . . 471
Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 11

Table of Contents

Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474

Advanced Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
Trends Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 485
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Ramp/Soak (RMPS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489
Advanced Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 490
Trends Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Totalizer (TOT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Display Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Operator Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 494
Maintenance Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495
Advanced Tab. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 496
Trends Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 497
Diagnostics Tab . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498

12 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Preface

This document explains the visualization files and the Human Machine
Interfaces (HMI) that are contained in Add-On Instructions that comprise the
volume of Rockwell Automation® Library of Process Objects. Sections are
divided into classifications that are based on what criteria the Add-On
Instructions control and monitor, such as motors.

Figure 1 - PlantPAx System Implementation and Documentation Strategy

Define and
Install Prep Develop Operate
Procure

• Selection Guide • Virtualization User Manual • Infrastructure User Manual • Application User Manual • Verify and Troubleshoot User Manual
PROCES-SG001 9528-UM001 PROCES-UM001 PROCES-UM003 PROCES-UM004
• Reference Manual • Reference Manual • Reference Manual
PROCES-RM001 PROCES-RM001 PROCES-RM001
• Library of Process Objects
PROCES-RM013
PROCES-RM014

• Define and Procure – Helps you understand the elements of the

PlantPAx® system to make sure that you buy the proper components.
• Install – Provides direction on how to install the PlantPAx system.
• Prep – Provides guidance on how to get started before you develop your
application.
• Develop – Describes the actions and libraries necessary to construct
your application that resides on the PlantPAx system.
• Operate – Provides guidance on how to verify and maintain your
systems for operation of your plant.

Additional Resources These documents contain additional information that concerns related
products from Rockwell Automation.
Resource Description
PlantPAx Distributed Control System Selection Guide, Provides basic definitions of system elements and sizing
publication PROCES-SG001 guidelines for procuring a PlantPAx system.
PlantPAx Distributed Control System Infrastructure Describes procedures for how to configure system
Configuration User Manual, publication PROCES-UM001 components that comprise a PlantPAx modern DCS.
PlantPAx Distributed Control System Application Describes procedures to start development of your
Configuration User Manual, publication PROCES-UM003 PlantPAx distributed control system.
PlantPAx Distributed Control System Reference Manual, Provides characterized recommendations for
publication PROCES-RM001 implementing your PlantPAx system.
Rockwell Automation Library of Process Objects Reference Provides an overview of the code objects, display
Manuals: elements, and faceplates that comprise the Rockwell
publication PROCES-RM013 Automation Library of Process Objects.
publication PROCES-RM014

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 13

Preface

Resource Description
Rockwell Automation Library of Logix Diagnostic Objects Provides information on Add-On Instructions that
Reference Manual, publication PROCES-RM003 monitor Logix controllers to diagnose issues that
include memory usage, communication, and control.
Rockwell Automation Library of Steam Table Instructions, Provides Add-On Instructions for to calculate
publication PROCES-RM004 temperature and pressure steam tables.
Redundant I/O System User Manual, Explains how to install and configure the 1715
publication 1715-UM001 Redundant
I/O system.
Product Compatibility and Download Center at Website helps you find product-related downloads
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/ including firmware, release notes, associated software,
support/pcdc.page drivers, tools, and utilities.
Rockwell Automation Sample Code website Accesses a Rockwell Automation web page to search for
at http://samplecode.rockwellautomation.com sample code.

You can view or download publications at

http://www.rockwellautomation.com/literature/. To order paper copies of
technical documentation, contact your local Allen-Bradley distributor or
Rockwell Automation sales representative.

14 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Chapter 1

Overview

This manual compiles the HMI visualization files that comprise the Rockwell
Automation® Library of Process Objects from individual manuals into one
reference manual. Before this software release, each object was documented in
a separate manual. These objects, which are arranged by device family, provide
visual components to enable interaction with instrument data.

There are three visualization files that are associated with each Add-On
Instruction: Images, Global objects, and HMI faceplates. This manual features
the visualization files that control various instructions for motors, valves,
drives, interlocks, permissives, and additional devices that can be used with the
PlantPAx® system.

IMPORTANT To view spreadsheets with logic for each Add-On Instruction, see the
Rockwell Automation Library of Process Objects: Controller Code
Reference Manual, publication PROCES-RM013.

The required visualization files are included in the Process Library download
from the Product Compatibility and Download Center (PCDC). The files
build on one another and must be imported in the following order:
• Images
• Global objects
• Standard display files

Images are external graphic files that can be used in displays. They must be
downloaded from PCDC to be used by FactoryTalk® View software.

Global object files are display elements that are created once and referenced
multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to a global object, all instances in the application are automatically updated.

Global objects serve two purposes:

• Faceplate object files contain common elements that are used to build
faceplate displays.
• Graphics Library files contain device symbols that you can use to build
your application displays. Click the symbol to open the corresponding
faceplate display.

Standard display files, commonly called faceplates, provide a common user

interface.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 15

Chapter 1 Overview

Required Files Visualization files can be downloaded from the PCDC at http://
www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/support/pcdc.page.

IMPORTANT The visualization file dependencies require Process Library content imports
to occur in a specific order:
• Images
• Global Objects
• Standard Displays
• HMI Tags
• Macros

The following table describes the visualization file types.

Table 1 - Visualization File Types
File Type FactoryTalk View SE FactoryTalk View ME Description
Abbreviations
Images (.png) All .png files in the images folder. Common icons that are
IMPORTANT: FactoryTalk View application renames PNG files used in the global
when they are imported with a .bmp file extension, but the files objects and standard
retain a .png format. displays for all Process
Objects.
Global objects (RA-BAS) precedes name of the (RA-BAS-ME) precedes Examples:
(.ggfx) global object. name of the global object. (RA-BAS) Common
Faceplate Objects
(RA-BAS-ME) Common
Faceplate Objects
Standard (RA-BAS) precedes name of the (RA-BAS-ME) precedes Examples:
displays (.gfx) display. name of the display. (RA-BAS) P_AIn-
Faceplate
(RA-BAS-ME) P_AIn-
Faceplate

16 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Overview Chapter 1

Table 1 - Visualization File Types

File Type FactoryTalk View SE FactoryTalk View ME Description
Abbreviations
HMI tags (.csv) FTViewSE_ProcessLibrary_Tags_4_0 FTViewME_ProcessLibrary HMI tags are created in a
_xx.csv _Tags_4_0_xx.csv FactoryTalk View ME
where xx = the service release where xx = the service application to support
number. release number. security, tab control, and
other features on Process
Library faceplates. HMI
tags can be imported via
the
comma-separated values
file (.csv file type).
Macros (.mcr NavToBuiltInCCFaceplate.mcr In a FactoryTalk View SE
file) NavToBuiltInCCQuick.mcr application, a macro is a
NavToBuiltInIMCFaceplate.mcr series of commands that
are stored in a text file.
NavToBuiltInIMCQuick.mcr
In a FactoryTalk View ME
NavToBuiltInMMCFaceplate.mcr application, a macro is a
NavToBuiltInMMCQuick.mcr list of tag assignments
NavToBuiltInPIDEFaceplate.mcr that are stored in a text
NavToBuiltInPIDEQuick.mcr file.
NavToBuiltInRMPSFaceplate.mcr
NavToBuiltInTotalizerFaceplate.mcr
NavToChildFaceplate.mcr
NavToFaceplate with line of site.mcr*
NavToFaceplate.mcr
NavToP_LLS_Motor.mcr
NavToQuick with line of site.mcr*
NavToQuick.mcr
* To restrict the operation of equipment based on line of site requirements, rename the macros:
"NavToFaceplate with line of site.mcr" to "NavToFaceplate.mcr"
"NavToQuick with line of site.mcr" to "NavToQuick.mcr"

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 17

Chapter 1 Overview

Basic Attributes and This section shows examples of visual tools that are common for global objects
in the Rockwell Automation Library of Process Objects. Visual tools are
Indicators critical to the daily operation of a plant.

Common attributes of global objects typically include:

• Status/quality/threshold indicator
• Maintenance bypass indicator
• Engineering units
• Label
• Command Source indicator (only for non-analog inputs)
• Alarm border that changes color and blinks on unacknowledged alarm
• Alarm indicator symbol that changes with the severity of an alarm

1
2
3 7
4
5 8

Table 2 - Global Objects Description

Item Description
1 Alarm indicator
2 Alarm border
3 Command source indicator (In the example the flag indicates not in normal command source)
4 Label
5 Process variable
6 Maintenance bypass indicator
7 Not Ready Indicator
8 Engineering units

Each graphic object includes a touch field over it that opens the faceplate. In
addition, there is a tooltip on the graphic symbol that displays the configured
tag and description.

18 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Overview Chapter 1

State Indicators

The State Indicator text and the color change depending on the state of the
drive. The indicators and colors are common across all Add-On
Instructions.

Table 3 - State Indicator Colors

Color State
Dark gray Stopped
Light Blue Starting
Light blue Jogging
Light Blue Stopping
White Running

Status/Quality Indicators

One of these symbols appears on the graphic symbol when the described
condition is true.
Table 4 - Status/Quality Indicators
Graphic Symbol Description
No symbol that is I/O communication and quality good, configuration valid
displayed
Invalid configuration

Data quality bad/failure

Data Quality degraded: uncertain, test, simulation, substitution, or out of specification

Device not ready to operate

The input or device has been disabled

Alarm Inhibit (Suppressed or Bypassed)

Device in loopback test

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 19

Chapter 1 Overview

Table 4 - Status/Quality Indicators

Graphic Symbol Description
At target speed

Speed ref limited to the minimum / maximum

Value infinite or not a number

value is being held at last good value

Input Controlled Variable that is clamped to minimum / maximum

Output Controlled Variable that is clamped to minimum / maximum

Accelerating

Decelerating

Value is being initialized

Value has not changed (stuck)

Value is being replaced

Input matches target

input does not match target

Auto loop mode

Manual loop mode

Cascade loop mode

Motor not controllable

20 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Overview Chapter 1

Table 4 - Status/Quality Indicators

Graphic Symbol Description
Process Variable within setpoint deadband (no control action occurs)

Raise Process Variable output that is energized

Lower Process Variable output that is energized

TIP When the Invalid Configuration indicator appears, you can find what
configuration setting is invalid by following the indicators. Click the graphic
symbol to open the faceplate. The Invalid Configuration indicator appears
next to the appropriate tab at the top of the faceplate to guide you to the
configuration error. Once you navigate to the tab, the misconfiguration is
flagged with this indicator.

Threshold Indicators

These indicators show that the process variable has exceeded a threshold.

Table 5 - Threshold Indicators

Graphic Symbol Description
High-high threshold exceeded

High threshold exceeded

Low threshold exceeded

Low-low threshold exceeded

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 21

Chapter 1 Overview

Deviation Indicators

These indicators warn of exceeding the deviation limits.

Table 6 - Deviation Indicators

Graphic Symbol Description
High-high deviation exceeded

High deviation exceeded

Low deviation exceeded

Low-low deviation exceeded

Command Source Indicators

The command source indicator displays by exception only. For example, if the
device is operating normally, there is not an indicator. If the device is out of
service (OoS), then the OoS indicator is displayed.

Command source indicators are not used for analog inputs.

Table 7 - Command Source Indicators

Graphic Symbol Description
No Symbol Device is in normal command source operation
Device is out of service

Device is not in normal command source operation

Device is in program command source operation

Device is in program locked command source

Device is in maintenance command source operation

Device is in operator command source operation

22 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Overview Chapter 1

Table 7 - Command Source Indicators

Graphic Symbol Description
Device is in external command source operation

Device is in operator locked command source operation

Device is in override command source operation

Device is in local command source operation

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 23

Chapter 1 Overview

Maintenance Bypass Indicator

The maintenance bypass indicator appears to the right of the label to indicate
that a maintenance bypass has been activated. The Maintenance bypass
indicator appears when the Substitute PV function is enabled. A Maintenance-
entered value supersedes the ‘live’ process variable.
Table 8 - Maintenance Bypass Indicator
Graphic Symbol Description
A maintenance bypass is active

No symbol that is displayed No maintenance bypass is active

TIP When the Maintenance bypass indicator appears, you can find what
condition was bypassed by following the indicators. Click the graphic symbol
to open the faceplate. The Maintenance bypass indicator appears next to the
appropriate tab at the top of the faceplate to guide you to the bypass. Once
you navigate to the tab, the bypassed item is flagged with this indicator.

24 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Overview Chapter 1

Basic Faceplate Attributes Faceplates consist of tabs, and each tab consists of one or more pages. The
Operator (Home) tab is displayed when the faceplate is initially opened. The
faceplate provides the means for operators, maintenance personnel, engineers,
and others to interact with an instruction instance, which includes a view of its
status and values. Faceplates also manipulate an instruction through its
commands and settings. Click the appropriate icon on the left of the faceplate to
access a specific tab. This section provides an overview of the faceplate
attributes that are common across the objects. More details are supplied in the
individual section for each object.

Operator (Home) Tab

1 7
2

3
4

6 8

Table 9 - Operator Tab Description

Item Action
1 Click to open the operator tab.
2 Click to open the maintenance tab.
3 Click to open the trends tab.
4 Click to open the diagnostics tab.
5 Click to open the alarm tab.
6 Click to open the help file.
7 Click to reset and acknowledge all alarms.
8 If the object is configured to have permissive and interlock objects (for example, Cfg_HasPermObj
(Fast or Slow) or Cfg_HasIntlkObj is true), the permissive and interlock indication become buttons.
These buttons open the faceplates of the source objects that are used as a permissive or interlock.
Often this object is a P_Perm or P_Intlk object. If the object is not configured in this way, the
permissive or interlock symbols are indicators only.
See Permissives with Bypass (P_Perm) on page 44
See Interlocks with First Out and Bypass (P_Intlk) on page 37

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 25

Chapter 1 Overview

Maintenance Tab

In the maintenance tab, there is a button for Advanced properties. There are
also page identifiers at the bottom if there are multiple configuration pages. See
the following diagram for common attributes of the maintenance tab.

Table 10 - Maintenance Tab Attributes

Item Action
1 Click to open the Advanced Properties.
2 Page identifiers. This example shows page 3.

26 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Overview Chapter 1

Advanced Properties

The advanced maintenance, engineering, HMI configuration, Diagnostics,

and Faults tabs for the objects are available in the advanced properties
faceplate. The advanced maintenance and engineering tabs have object-specific
configurations that are detailed for each object.

The HMI configuration tab has settings that are common to the objects. See
the following diagram for common attributes of the HMI configuration tab.
4
1 5

3
6
7
8

Table 11 - Common HMI Configuration Tab Attributes

Item Action
1 Click to open the engineering tab.
2 Click to open the Advanced Maintenance tab.
3 Type the device description to show on the faceplate title bar.
4 Click to open the diagnostics tab.
5 Click to open the faults tab.
6 Type the label to show on the graphic symbol.
7 Type the tag name to show on the faceplate and Tooltip.
IMPORTANT: Pause the mouse over this field to display a tool tip with the configured Logix tag/
path.
8 Type the Area name for security.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 27

Chapter 1 Overview

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications that are helpful to diagnose or help
prevent device problems. These problems can include specific reasons a device
is 'Not Ready', device warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and
predictive/preventive maintenance data.

The Diagnostics tab displays possible reasons for the device not being ready.

Faults Tab

The faults tab contains specific reasons that the device is not ready.

28 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Overview Chapter 1

Trends Tab

The Trends tab shows trend charts of key device data over time. These faceplate
trends provide a quick view of current device performance to supplement, but
not replace, dedicated historical or live trend displays.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7

Table 12 - Trends Tab Description

Item Description
1 Click to view the oldest data available.
2 Click to move trend data back 2 minutes.
3 Click to move trend data back 1 minute.
4 Click to scroll new data.
5 Click to move trend data forward 1 minute.
6 Click to move trend data forward 2 minutes.
7 Click to move to the most current trend data.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 29

Chapter 1 Overview

Alarms Tab

The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the
alarms page has an outline that changes color to show the current active alarm
status. See Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm) on page 51 for more
information.

Help Button

Press the help button on the faceplates to access help specific to that faceplate.
The help file is in .pdf format and opens in a separate window. See the
following example:

Figure 2 - Help Example

30 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Overview Chapter 1

Quick Display Interaction A Quick Display provides means for operators to perform simple interactions
with an instruction that is instance based on a task. From the Quick Display,
click the Home button to navigate to the faceplate for full access for operation,
maintenance, and configuration. All other buttons function the same as on the
main faceplate. The following figures show examples of quick displays.

Figure 3 - P_ValveMP

Figure 4 - P_Dose

Figure 5 - P_PIDE

Figure 6 - P_PF755

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 31

Chapter 1 Overview

Using a Display Element Global objects are typically found in the global object file per instruction. For
example: (RA-BAS) P_AIn Graphics Library.ggfx.

Follow these steps to use a global object.

1. Copy the global object from the global object file and paste it in the
display file.

2. In the display, right-click the global object and choose Global

ObjectParameter Values.

The Global Object Parameter Values dialog box appears.

32 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Overview Chapter 1

The global object parameters are as follows.

Parameter Required Description
#102 Y Object tag to point to the name of the associated object Add-On Instruction in the
controller.
#103 Y Path that is used for display navigation features to other objects. Include program
scope if tag is a program scope tag.
#120 N Additional parameter to pass to the display command to open the faceplate.
Typically used to define position for the faceplate.
#121 N Additional parameter to pass to the display command to open the faceplate. To
define X and Y coordinates, separate parameters so that #120 defines X and #121
defines Y. This separation lets these same parameters be used in subsequent
display commands that originate from the faceplate.
#122 Y The following are the options for the global object display:
0 = Always show faceplate
1 = Show Quick Display for users without Maintenance access (Code C)
2= Always show Quick Display

3. In the Value column, type the tag or value as specified in the

Description column.

TIP Click the ellipsis (...) to browse and select a tag.

Values for items that are not required can be left blank.

Figure 7 - Example Parameter Values Dialog Box

4. Click OK.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 33

Chapter 1 Overview

Notes:

34 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Chapter 2

Cross Functional Family

The process objects in this group are often used to extend the functionality of
other objects. However, they can also be used as standalone objects when
necessary to implement a desired control scheme.

Condition Gate Delay The P_Gate (Condition Gate Delay) Add-On Instruction provides a ‘gate’ for
a discrete signal and provides on-delay and off-delay timing for the gated signal.
(P_Gate)
P_Gate is used within P_DIn, all Analog inputs, and P_PIDE for threshold
and target disagree status processing.

When the gate input is true, the input is passed through to the output with
on-delay and off-delay timing applied. When the gate input is false, the output
is kept off (the off-delay still applies).

Display Elements

The P_Gate instruction is used within other device instructions to provide

status and alarm timing functions. There are no dedicated display elements for
this instruction. The faceplate is called from the containing instruction
faceplate.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 35

Chapter 2 Cross Functional Family

Faceplate

From the faceplate, an operator can monitor the device status.

The Operator tab shows the following information:

• Indicators that show the current Input Value and Output Status
• Gate Input status indicator

The following figure shows the P_Gate faceplate.

4
5

Table 13 - Operator Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type the text for the gate condition.
2 Type the text for the input condition.
This text appears on the Maintenance tab of the faceplate from which the P_Gate faceplate is opened.
3 Type the amount of time (in seconds) the gate input must be turned on for status outputs to be enabled.
4 Type the minimum time (in seconds) the input must be true to set the status.
On-delay times are typically used to avoid an unnecessary status indication or alarm when a value briefly
overshoots its threshold.
5 Type the amount of time (in seconds) the input must be clear in the status. Off delay times are typically
used to reduce chattering status indicators or alarms.

36 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Cross Functional Family Chapter 2

Interlocks with First Out and The P_Intlk (Interlocks with First Out and Bypass) Add-On Instruction is
used to collect (sum up) the interlock conditions that stop or de-energize a
Bypass (P_Intlk) running or energized piece of equipment. This Add-On Instruction can also
help prevent it from starting or being energized. Interlocks are always evaluated
to de-energize equipment. For permissive conditions that must be made to
start the equipment, but are ignored once the equipment is running, use the
Permissives (P_Perm) Add-On Instruction.

Display Elements
A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced
multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix® system, aid consistency and save engineering time.

Table 14 - P_Intlk Display Element Description

Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_P_Intlk Standard Interlock Global Object.

Graphic symbols are provided for use on end-user process graphic displays.
Interlock graphic symbols have the following common attributes.

1 2

Table 15 - P_Intlk Graphic Symbol Description

Item Description
1 Status Indicator
2 Bypass Indicator

The Interlock graphic symbol displays the current summary state of the
interlocks and whether the interlocks are bypassed.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 37

Chapter 2 Cross Functional Family

Table 16 - Interlock States

Item Description
Not ready to run or energize. One or more interlock conditions are not OK

Ready to run or energize. One or more conditions that can be bypassed are
not OK, but these conditions are bypassed. All conditions that cannot be
bypassed are OK.

Ready to run or energize. All interlock conditions are OK.

Ready to run or energize, and all interlock conditions are OK, conditions
that can be bypassed are being bypassed and the equipment is not shut
down.

The overall graphic symbol includes a touch field that opens the faceplate. In
the SE version of the library, pause the pointing device over the graphic symbol
to display a tooltip that describes the function of the symbol.

38 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Cross Functional Family Chapter 2

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) Tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status.

The Operator tab shows the following information:

• Interlock bypass status indicator (Enabled, Bypassed)
• Each configured interlock along with the current state of the interlock

If navigation is enabled, click a condition to open the faceplate of the object

that is associated with the condition.

The following figure shows the Operator tab in a non-bypassed condition with
no faults.

The following figure shows the Operator tab in a non-bypassed condition with
a failure.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 39

Chapter 2 Cross Functional Family

The following figure shows the Operator tab with a failure that is in a bypassed
condition.

40 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Cross Functional Family Chapter 2

Maintenance Tab

The maintenance tab is used to enable bypass of the interlocks that can be
bypassed.

IMPORTANT Only interlocks with white checkboxes can be individually bypassed.

These interlocks are configured using the 'Can Bypass' column on
the engineering tab.

The following table lists the functions on the Maintenance tab.

Table 17 - Maintenance Tab Descriptions

Item Description
1 Click an interlock condition that can be bypassed, one that has a white checkbox, to enable
bypass of that individual interlock.
See HMI Configuration Tab on page 43 for information on how to make interlock conditions
active.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 41

Chapter 2 Cross Functional Family

Advanced Properties Display

Click the Advanced Properties button to display the engineering and HMI
configuration tabs. The Advanced Properties Display provides access to device
configuration parameters and ranges, and options for device and I/O setup.
The engineering tab and the HMI configuration tab can be reached from the
Advanced Properties Display. This tab is used for initial system commissioning
or later system changes.

Engineering Tab

Up to 16 interlock inputs can be configured.

1 4

The following table lists the functions of the engineering tab.

Table 18 - Engineering Tab Description

Item Description
1 Selects the state of the corresponding interlock that is the OK to Run state.
2 Type the text description of each interlock condition used. Only the interlocks with text entered appear
on the Operator tab of the faceplate.
3 Check to indicate that the corresponding interlock can be bypassed.
4 Check to indicate that the corresponding interlock is latched and must be reset.

42 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Cross Functional Family Chapter 2

HMI Configuration Tab

Configure the description, label, tag, and security area for the device. See Basic
Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for the description of the common attributes.
Navigation for the 16 interlock inputs is configured across each of the HMI
configuration tabs.

1
2

Table 19 - HMI Configuration Tab Description

Item Description
1 Check to enable navigation for the corresponding interlock input object.
2 Type the name of the tag to navigate to when the interlock description on the Operator tab is clicked.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 43

Chapter 2 Cross Functional Family

Permissives with Bypass The P_Perm (Permissives with bypass) Add-On Instruction is used to collect
(sum up) the permissive conditions that allow a piece of equipment to start
(P_Perm) (run, energize, open, and so forth). Permissive conditions generally must be
true to start the equipment. Once the equipment is running, permissives are
ignored. Use the P_Intlk (Interlocks) Add-On Instruction to collect
conditions that stop equipment that is running and help prevent it from
starting.

Display Elements
A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced
multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects with tag structures in the
ControlLogix system, aid consistency and save engineering time.

Table 20 - P_Perm Display Element Description

Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_P_Perm Standard Permissive Global Object.

Graphic symbols are provided for use on end-user process graphic displays.
Permissives graphic symbols have the following common attributes.

1 2

Table 21 - P_Perm Graphic Symbol Description

Item Description
1 Status Indicator
2 Bypass Indicator

The Permissives graphic symbol displays the current summary state of the
permissives and whether permissives are bypassed.

44 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Cross Functional Family Chapter 2

Table 22 - Permissive States

Item Description
Not ready to run or energize. One or more interlock conditions are not OK

Ready to run or energize. One or more conditions that can be bypassed are
not OK, but these conditions are bypassed. All conditions that cannot be
bypassed are OK.

Ready to run or energize. All interlock conditions are OK.

Ready to run or energize, and all interlock conditions are OK, conditions
that can be bypassed are being bypassed and the equipment is not shut
down.

The overall graphic symbol includes a touch field over it that opens the
faceplate. In addition, pause the mouse over the graphic symbol to display a
tooltip that describes the function of the symbol.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 45

Chapter 2 Cross Functional Family

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status.

The Operator tab shows the following information:

• Permissive bypass status indicator (Enabled, Bypassed)
• Each configured permissive along with the current state of the
permissive

If navigation is enabled, click the condition to open the faceplate of the object
that is associated with the condition.

46 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Cross Functional Family Chapter 2

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters. They also troubleshoot and temporarily work
around device problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance.

IMPORTANT Only interlocks with white checkboxes can be individually bypassed.

These interlocks are configured by using the 'Can Bypass' column on
the engineering tab.

The following table lists the functions on the Maintenance tab.

Table 23 - Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Click an active permissive, one that has a white checkbox, to enable bypass of that individual
permissive.
See HMI Configuration Tab on page 49 for information on how to make permissive conditions
active.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 47

Chapter 2 Cross Functional Family

Advanced Properties Display

Click the Advanced Properties button to display the engineering and HMI
configuration tabs. The Advanced Properties Display provides access to device
configuration parameters and ranges, and options for device and I/O setup.
The engineering tab and the HMI configuration tab can be reached from the
Advanced Properties Display. This tab is used for initial system commissioning
or later system changes.

Engineering Tab

1 3

The following table lists the functions of the engineering tab.

Table 24 - Engineering Tab Description

Item Description
1 Selects the state of the corresponding permissive that is the OK to Run state.
2 Type the text description of each permissive condition used. Only the permissives with text entered
appear on the Operator tab of the faceplate.
3 Check to indicate that the corresponding permissive can be bypassed.

48 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Cross Functional Family Chapter 2

HMI Configuration Tab

Configure the description, label, tag, and security area for the device. See Basic
Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for the description of the common attributes.
Navigation for the 16 permissive inputs is configured across each of the HMI
configuration tabs.

1
2

Table 25 - HMI Configuration Tab Description

Item Description
1 Check to enable navigation for the corresponding permissive input object.
2 Type the name of the tag to navigate to when the permissive description on the Operator tab is clicked.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 49

Chapter 2 Cross Functional Family

Central Reset (P_Reset) The P_Reset (Central Reset) Add-On Instruction provides a central point to
reset equipment faults. Latched alarms can be reset for a control strategy.

Graphic Symbols

The following table describes the graphic symbols of the P_Reset.

Table 26 - Graphic Symbols Description

Button Description
The same as the reset buttons used in other Process Library Faceplates and screens and
is for use on end-user process graphic displays.

The reset button is inactive.

50 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Cross Functional Family Chapter 2

Common Alarm Block The P_Alarm (Common Alarm Block) Add-On Instruction is used to provide
notification to operators of abnormal conditions or events. This instruction
(P_Alarm) handles alarm acknowledgment, alarm reset, alarm shelving/disabling, and
alarm suppression (for FactoryTalk® Alarms and Events). This instruction
excludes display elements.

Alarm Indicators

One of these symbols appears on the left of the label to indicate the described
alarm condition. The alarm border blinks if acknowledgment of an alarm
condition is required. Once the alarm is acknowledged, the alarm border
remains the color that corresponds to the severity of the alarm and the alarm
symbol is still present.

Table 27 - Alarm Indicators Description

Symbol Border Color Description
Red Urgent-severity alarm

Orange High-severity alarm

Yellow Medium-severity alarm

Magenta Low-severity alarm

White Return to normal (no alarm condition), but a previous alarm

has not been acknowledged

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 51

Chapter 2 Cross Functional Family

Alarm indicators appear on the Home tab when the corresponding alarm
occurs. The alarm indicator appears in the top banner along with the matching
color border. The colored border blinks when an alarm is identified. The
Alarm tab also has a border with the alarm color when an alarm is identified.
The following diagram provides an example of a PV High alarm on an analog
input device.

2
5

Table 28 - Alarm Identifiers Description

Item Description
1 PV High Alarm Identified
2 Alarm Border Colored
3 Alarm Tab
4 Alarm Tab Border Colored
5 High limit on display has changed to the alarm color to show that the threshold limit has been
exceeded

52 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Cross Functional Family Chapter 2

Alarm Tab

The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm for the P_ instruction. The
alarm border blinks if acknowledgment of an alarm condition is required. Once
the alarm is acknowledged, the alarm border remains the color that corresponds
to the severity of the alarm and the alarm symbol is still present.

When the Reset and Acknowledge All Alarms button is enabled, the border
the alarm name blinks. This blinking indicates that the alarm requires
acknowledgment or reset. The Alarm Acknowledge button is enabled if the
alarm requires acknowledgment.

Table 29 - Alarm Tab Description

Item Description
1 Alarm Description
2 Click to reset and acknowledge all alarms.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 53

Chapter 2 Cross Functional Family

Alarm Operator Tab

Click the alarm name to open the operator tab for that alarm.

3
1

4
2

Table 30 - Alarm Operator Tab Description

Item Description
1 Alarm status
2 Individual status information indicators
3 Acknowledge Alarm. This command acknowledges an alarm that has been configured with “Ack
Required”.
4 Reset Alarm
5 Shelve alarm
6 Unshelve alarm

54 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Cross Functional Family Chapter 2

Alarm Maintenance Tab

Click the alarm box to open the maintenance tab. From this tab, you can test
the alarm, disable the alarm, and set the severity level of the alarm.

Alarms Advanced Settings

Click the advanced properties button for more options.

The advanced properties include both an engineering tab and an HMI

configuration tab. The HMI configuration tab is used to configure the name of
the alarm. The engineering tab sets the parameters for the alarm.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 55

Chapter 2 Cross Functional Family

Command Source (P_CmdSrc) The P_CmdSrc (Command Source) Add-On Instruction is used to provide
selection of the command source (owner) of an instruction or control strategy.
This instruction excludes display elements.

The command source indicator displays by exception only. For example, if the
device is operating normally, there is not an indicator. If the device is out of
service (OoS), then the OoS indicator is displayed.

Command source indicators are not used for analog inputs.

Table 31 - Command Source Indicators
Graphic Symbol Description
No Symbol Device is in normal command source operation
Device is out of service

Device is not in normal command source operation

Device is in program command source operation

Device is in maintenance command source operation

Device is in operator command source operation

Device is in override command source operation

Device is in local command source operation

Device is in external command source operation

56 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Cross Functional Family Chapter 2

Command Source Totem Pole

The Command Source Totem Pole shows the sources that have been requested.
These sources have a white background color. The leftmost source that is
highlighted is the active command source.

In the example that follows, the current command source is Operator Locked.
When Operator Locked is released, the default command source is Operator.
The small black triangle, in the upper left corner of the operator indicator
indicates the normal command source.

Operator Buttons

The Operator Lock buttons on device faceplates are used to lock and unlock
Operator command source. The buttons also show the current command
source status

Table 32 - Operator Buttons Description

Graphic Symbol Description
Click to request Operator command source.

Click to lock in Operator command source. The program cannot take control.

Click to request Program command source.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 57

Chapter 2 Cross Functional Family

Maintenance Buttons

The maintenance buttons on device faceplates are used to request and release
Maintenance command source.

Table 33 - Maintenance Buttons Description

Graphic Symbol Description
Click to acquire Maintenance command source.

Click to release Maintenance command source.

Click to display Advanced Properties command source.

58 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Cross Functional Family Chapter 2

Advanced Properties

Click the Advanced Properties button from the maintenance page to access the
engineering tabs. There are three engineering tabs. The first page is the
configuration for the Cfg_ProgDefault parameter for the object, which sets the
default command source when no command source is being requested.

From the other pages, you can configure the settings for additional command
sources.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 59

Chapter 2 Cross Functional Family

Operator Prompt (P_Prompt) The P_Prompt (Operator Prompt) Add-On Instruction is a universal
mechanism for operator interaction that can be used within a control scheme.
The instruction presents an operator with configurable message or data fields
and accepts operator response data and confirmation. This instruction excludes
display elements.

Graphic Symbols

The following table describes the graphic symbols of the P_Prompt.

Table 34 - Graphic Symbols Description

Graphic Symbol Description
Standalone prompt button that assumes the
P_Prompt instruction is present and the button is
always visible. The Prompt instruction controls the
enabled state and alert indicator visibility of the
button.

Prompt display indicator for use on faceplates and

displays for objects that possibly do not have a prompt
instruction.

60 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Cross Functional Family Chapter 2

Faceplates

The P_Prompt instruction has three faceplates: Selection, Configuration, and

Response.

Selection Faceplate

The Prompt Selection display provides access to the configuration dialog box
for a given prompt configuration in the prompts array by clicking the
corresponding browse button.

1
2

Table 35 - Selection Faceplate Description

Item Description
1 Click the radio button to select a prompt.
2 Click to open the configuration faceplate.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 61

Chapter 2 Cross Functional Family

Configuration Faceplate

The Prompt Configuration dialog box has four sections to configure a prompt.
The sections are Display Values, Input Values, Selection Options, and
Response Prompts.

Figure 8 - Display Values

2 3 4 5 6 7

Table 36 - Display Values Description

Item Description
1 Check to enable a label text field.
2 Type a label.
3 Type an engineering unit.
4 Type the decimal places to display.
5 Check to either display a value from the prompt 'AOI Input' or the value that you enter in the box that
appears.
6 Check to scale the value by the entered value and the Inp_ScalePct.
7 Check to require the operator to verify the displayed value.

62 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Cross Functional Family Chapter 2

Figure 9 - Input Values

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Table 37 - Input Values Description

Item Description
1 Check to enable a label text box.
2 Type a label for the input value.
3 Type an engineering unit.
4 Type the decimal places to display.
5 Type a minimum value for the entry
6 Type a maximum value for the entry.
7 Check to require an operator to enter a value.
8 If an input is not required, click Minimum or Maximum to be used for the entry.

Figure 10 - Selection Options

2 3

Table 38 - Selection Options Description

Item Description
1 Check to enable a label text box.
2 Check and type a label for the selection option.
3 Click to designate a selection as the default.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 63

Chapter 2 Cross Functional Family

Figure 11 - Response Prompts

2 3

Table 39 - Response Prompts Description

Item Description
1 Check to enable a label text box.
2 Check and type a label for the response prompt.
3 Check to require an input.

Response Faceplate

This faceplate lets the operator review and record data based on the prompt.
All values are configured on the prompt configuration faceplate. The operator
clicks the checkbox to continue.

64 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Cross Functional Family Chapter 2

Boolean Logic with Snapshot The P_Logic (Boolean Logic with Snapshot) Add-On Instruction executes up
to eight gates of configurable Boolean logic. Gate types available include AND,
(P_Logic) OR, XOR (Exclusive-OR), Set/Reset, Select, and Majority. Each gate provides
up to four input conditions that are individually invertible. (The P_Logic
instruction does not need a NOT gate.)

The P_Logic Add-On Instruction also provides a snapshot capability. This

capability enables it to record its current state with an optional time stamp.
This snapshot can be taken upon change in output state, on Operator or
Program command, or based on a logic loopback input.

Display Elements
The P_Logic Instruction has display elements (global objects) for use on
process graphic displays. These elements provide you with the following:
• Information on the current state of the object
• Touch field to open the faceplate of the object
• Tooltip to display the configured tag and description of the object

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 65

Chapter 2 Cross Functional Family

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device.

The Operator tab shows the following information:

• The eight Boolean inputs and eight logic gates, with each gate having a
maximum of four sources.
• Configurable operator snapshot command button creates an image of
the logic.
• Provides a progress indicator for the on-delay time and off-delay time for
the output of the instruction. See Maintenance Tab on page 68 for
On-delay and off-delay configuration.
1 2 3

The following table describes the functions included on the Operator tab.
Table 40 - Operator Tab Description
Item Description
1 Input Name: Click to navigate to the Input object faceplate.
2 Gates: Click one of the gates to access the Gate Configuration display for that gate.
3 Click to take a snapshot of the current state.
IMPORTANT: When you take a snapshot, the View Snapshot tab is automatically displayed.

66 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Cross Functional Family Chapter 2

View Snapshot Tab

The View Snapshot tab shows an image of the Operator faceplate when the
snapshot was taken. The background of the display turns from gray to white to
indicate capture. The View Snapshot has the same functionality as the operator
faceplate plus a Reset button.
1

2 3

Table 41 - View Snapshot Tab Description

Item Description
1 Click to reset the snapshot function so that another snapshot can be triggered.
IMPORTANT: If ‘Allow a new snapshot to overwrite an existing snapshot without a snapshot reset' is
checked on the maintenance tab, a reset is not required trigger another snapshot.
2 Time stamp
3 Identifies how the snapshot was triggered.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 67

Chapter 2 Cross Functional Family

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters. They also troubleshoot and temporarily work
around device problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance.

1 2 3

Table 42 - Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type a value for the off-delay time and the on-delay time.
2 Check to allow a new snapshot to be triggered without a reset of the previous snapshot.
3 Check to generate a time stamp whenever a snapshot triggers.
4 Check to trigger a snapshot when the designated condition is met.

68 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Cross Functional Family Chapter 2

Advanced Properties Display

Click the Advanced Properties button to display the engineering and HMI
configuration tabs. The Advanced Properties Display provides access to device
configuration parameters and ranges, and options for device and I/O setup.
The engineering tab and the HMI configuration tab can be reached from the
Advanced Properties Display. This tab is used for initial system commissioning
or later system changes.

Engineering Tab

Table 43 - Engineering Tab Description

Item Description
1 Click to open the faceplate to select the output source. See Output Source on page 70
2 Check to invert the selected output before it is passed to the output delay timers
3 Click to open the Gate Configuration faceplate.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 69

Chapter 2 Cross Functional Family

Figure 12 - Output Source

70 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Cross Functional Family Chapter 2

Gate Configuration Display

The gate configuration display appears if a gate is clicked in the Operator, View
Snapshot, or Engineering tabs.
3 4 5

Table 44 - Gate Configuration Display Description

Item Description
1 Displays the gate being configured.
2 Check to select which inputs of the gate are enabled (1…4).
3 Click to select the inputs for the gate. See Gate Input Source on page 71
4 Check to invert the source that enters the gate.
5 Check to select a gate type.

Figure 13 - Gate Input Source

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 71

Chapter 2 Cross Functional Family

HMI Configuration Tab

Configure the description, label, tag, and security area for the device. See Basic
Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for the description of the common attributes.
The tab is separated into three pages. Page 1 contains the common information
and name conventions. Page 2 and three allow for navigation to the objects.

Table 45 - HMI Configuration Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Type the text to display on the faceplate when output = 0 or 1
2 Type a description for each input.

72 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Cross Functional Family Chapter 2

Table 46 - HMI Configuration Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Check to enable navigation to input object.
2 Type the tag name of the input object.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 73

Chapter 2 Cross Functional Family

Notes:

74 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Chapter 3

I/O Processing Family

The Process Objects in this group provide analog and discrete input/output
signal processing. Pressure/temperature compensated flow calculations and
cylindrical tank level interpolations are also provided.

Display Elements
A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced
multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated.

Use of global objects with tag structures in the ControlLogix® system aid
consistency and save engineering time.

The items in Table 47 are common to the following Add-On Instructions.

• Basic Analog Input (P_AIn)
• Advanced Analog Input (P_AInAdv)
• Dual Sensor Analog Input (P_AInDual)
• Multiple Analog Input (P_AInMulti)

If additional display elements are used, they are documented in the appropriate
section.
Table 47 - I/O Common Display Elements Descriptions
Name Display Element Description
GO_P_AIn Standard analog-input global
object.

GO_P_AIn_Trend Analog input with a trend of the

Process Variable and limits (high-
high, high, low, and low-low).

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 75

Chapter 3 I/O Processing Family

Table 47 - I/O Common Display Elements Descriptions

Name Display Element Description
GO_P_AIn_TrendWCapture Analog Input with Trend of Process
Variable and limits (high-high, high,
low, and low-low) plus a light gray
capture area.

GO_P_AIn_Indicator Process Variable indicated by a

moving triangle. The graphic display
includes limits that are displayed
with filled bars.

GO_P_AIn_IndicatorWCapture This object is the same as the

GO_P_Ain_Indicator plus a light
gray minimum/maximum capture
area.

GO_P_AInX Process Variable that is displayed as

a bar graph. The graphic display
includes limits that are displayed as
lines on the graph.

76 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 I/O Processing Family Chapter 3

Trends Tab

The Trends tab shows trend charts of key device data over time. These faceplate
trends provide a quick view of current device performance to supplement, but
not replace, dedicated historical or live trend displays. The trends displays are
common across all I/O Processing Add-On Instructions. For basic trends tab
functionality, See Trends Tab on page 29.

5
3

Table 48 - Trends Tab Description

Item Description
1 High-high threshold value.
2 Process Variable (%) value.
3 Low-low threshold value.
4 High threshold value.
5 Low threshold value.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 77

Chapter 3 I/O Processing Family

Basic Analog Input (P_AIn) The P_AIn Add-On Instruction monitors one analog value, typically from a
channel of an analog input module, and provides alarms when the analog value
exceeds user-specified thresholds (high and low).

The Analog Input instruction also provides capabilities for linear scaling of an
analog input value from raw (input) units to engineering (output) units. The
instruction can enter a substitute process variable, providing handling of an
out-of-range or faulted input.

Operator (Home) Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device.

2
3

1 5
6

The following table describes the functions included on the Home tab.
Table 49 - Operator Tab Description
Item Description
1 Current Process Variable Graph: Bar graph for the current Process Variable. High-high (HH) and low-low
(LL) ranges are shown in dark gray and these ranges change color based on alarm severity if the
threshold is exceeded. High and Low ranges are shown in medium gray, and these ranges also change
color based on alarm severity.
2 High-high Thresholds
3 High Threshold
4 Current Process Variable that is shown as an arrow on the graph and numerically.
5 Low Thresholds
6 Low-low Thresholds
7 Clear capture minimum / maximum extents

78 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 I/O Processing Family Chapter 3

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot, temporarily work around device
problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance.

5
1

6
3

IMPORTANT Click a threshold name to open the P_Gate faceplate. From the
P_Gate faceplate, you can configure and perform additional
operations for each alarm, including Gate Delay, Status On-delay,
Status Off-delay, and Threshold Name.

The following table shows the functions on the Maintenance tabs.

Table 50 - Maintenance Tab Page 1 Description
Item Description
1 Click this button to open the advanced properties. The engineering and HMI configuration settings
become available.
2 Threshold Name: Click a threshold name to open the associated P_Gate faceplate.
3 Page Identifier
4 Use Substitute PV: Click to input a substitute process variable.
5 Type the threshold (trip point) for analog input alarms.
6 Type the deadband (hysteresis) that applies to each alarm limit. Deadband helps prevent a noisy signal
from generating numerous spurious alarms.
Example: If the High alarm limit is 90.0 and the High alarm deadband is 5, once the signal rises above
90.0 and generates a High alarm. The signal must fall below 85.0 (90.0 minus 5.0) for the alarm to clear.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 79

Chapter 3 I/O Processing Family

Table 51 - Maintenance Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Threshold Name: Click a threshold name to open the associated P_Gate faceplate.
2 Type the threshold (trip point) minimum / maximum
3 Process variable fail deadband. Type the deadband (hysteresis) that is applied to each alarm limit.
Deadband helps prevent a noisy signal from generating numerous spurious alarms.
Example: If the High alarm limit is 90.0 and the High alarm deadband is 5, once the signal rises above
90.0 and generates a High alarm. The signal must fall below 85.0 (90.0 minus 5.0) for the alarm to clear.

80 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 I/O Processing Family Chapter 3

Advanced Properties Display

The Advanced Properties Display opens to the engineering settings. The

Advanced Properties Display provides access to device configuration
parameters and ranges, and options for device and I/O setup. This tab is used
for initial system commissioning or later system changes.

Engineering Tab

In the engineering settings, you can configure the Process Variable unit for the
device.

1 4

The following table lists the functions on the engineering tab.

Table 52 - Engineering Tab Description
Item Description
1 Input (unscaled) minimum and maximum
These parameters must be set to the range of the signal that is connected to the Inp_Process Variable
Input. The raw minimum default is 0.0 and the raw maximum default is 100.0.
Example: If your input card provides a signal from 4.0…20.0mA, set Cfg_InpRawMin to 4.0 and
Cfg_InpRawMax to 20.0. The raw minimum/maximum and engineering units minimum/maximum are
used for scaling to engineering units.
2 Check to allow the Substitute Process Variable Maintenance function.
Clear this checkbox to disallow the Substitute Process Variable Maintenance function (default).
3 PV Source and Quality
Generate SrcQ: This instruction determines the Process Variable quality using Inp_PVBad,
Inp_PVUncertain, and the PV value (out of range, infinite or not a number)

Pass thru connected Channel’s SrcQ value: This instruction uses the Source and Quality (SrcQ) value
that is provided by an upstream object (such as P_AIChan) via Inp_PVSrcQ to determine the PV source
and quality.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 81

Chapter 3 I/O Processing Family

Table 52 - Engineering Tab Description

Item Description
4 EU minimum and maximum for scaling
These parameters must be set to match the Process Variable range of the input signal that is connected to
Inp_PV. The Process Variable engineering units minimum default is 0.0 and the Process Variable
engineering units maximum is 100.0.
Example: If your input card provides a signal from 4…20 mA that represents -50…250 °C, set
Cfg_PVEUMIN to -50.0 and Cfg_PVEU maximum to 250.0.
The raw minimum/maximum and Process Variable engineering units minimum/maximum are used for
scaling to engineering units.
5 Type engineering units for display on the HMI. Percent (%) is the default.
6 Type the Process Variable filter time constant.
If the time constant is 0, the Process Variable is unfiltered.

HMI Configuration Tab

The HMI configuration tab provides access to displayed text, and

faceplate-to-faceplate navigation settings. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on
page 25 for the description of the common attributes.

Table 53 - HMI Configuration Tab Description

Item Description
1 Check to enable navigation to an upstream channel object (for example, P_).
IMPORTANT: The name of the Channel object in the controller must be the name of the object with the
suffix ‘_Chan’. For example, if your P_AIn object has the name ’AIn123’, then its Channel object must be
named ‘AIn123_Chan’.
2 Set the number of decimal places for the Process Variable.

82 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 I/O Processing Family Chapter 3

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications to diagnose device problems. This tab
includes device warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and predictive/
preventive maintenance data. The initial faceplate shows the raw input process
variable.

Click the raw input button to open the analog channel quality faceplate. This
tab provides an overview of the process variable. For more information on the
analog channel faceplate, See Analog Input Channel (P_AIChan) on page 92.

Alarms Tab
The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the
alarms page changes color to show the current active alarm status. A blinking
alarm icon indicates that one or more alarms must be acknowledged or the
device must be reset. See Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm) on page 51 for
more information.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 83

Chapter 3 I/O Processing Family

Advanced Analog Input The P_AInAdv Add-On Instruction monitors one analog value, typically from
an Analog Input I/O module. The Add-On Instruction has the same basic
(P_AInAdv) features as P_AIn. See Basic Analog Input (P_AIn) on page 78. This
instruction has the following advanced features that are not included in the
basic analog input:
• Square root scaling to provide positive or negative flow values
• Calculation of the Process Variable rate of change and configurable high
rate of change alarming
• Alarms for deviation from a reference value

Display Elements

A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced

multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures, aid
consistency and save engineering time.
Table 54 - P_AInAdv Display Elements Description
Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_P_AInAdv_Indicator A moving triangle indicates the
process variable. The graphic display
includes limits that are displayed with
filled bars plus a cyan target range
(for deviations).

GO_P_AInAdvTrend This graphic symbol includes a trend

with target lines and is intended to be
used for the Advanced Analog Input
Add-On Instruction.

84 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 I/O Processing Family Chapter 3

Table 54 - P_AInAdv Display Elements Description

Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_AInAdv_IndicatorWCapture A moving triangle indicates the
process variable. The graphic display
includes limits that are displayed with
filled bars plus a cyan target range
(for deviations) and a light gray
minimum/maximum capture area.

Operator Tab
The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device. The
home page contains the same basic information as the P_AIn Add-On
Instruction. See Basic Analog Input (P_AIn) on page 78. Additional
information is identified in the following diagram.

2
5

3 6
4

Table 55 - P_AInAdv Home Tab Description

Item Description
1 High Deviation limit: the label background that changes color based on alarm severity when exceeded.
2 Low Deviation limit: the label background that changes color based on alarm severity when exceeded.
3 The rate of change bar graph (visible if Rate of Change calculations is enabled on the engineering tab).
4 The rate of change value (visible if Rate of Change calculations is enabled on the engineering tab).
5 Process Variable target.
6 Reset Rate of Change value to zero.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 85

Chapter 3 I/O Processing Family

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot and temporarily work around
device problems. The maintenance tab for the P_AInAdv Add-On Instruction
has three pages. The first page contains the threshold and deadband
information and is the same as the P_AIn Add-On Instruction. See Basic
Analog Input (P_AIn) on page 78. Additional information for this instruction
is on pages two and three and can be seen in the following diagram.

Table 56 - Maintenance Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Process variable high/low deviation threshold. Type the threshold (trip point) for analog input alarms.
2 Process variable high/low deviation deadband. Type the deadband (hysteresis) that is applied to each
alarm limit. Deadband helps prevent a noisy signal from generating numerous spurious alarms.
Example: If the High alarm limit is 90.0 and the High alarm deadband is 5, once the signal rises above
90.0 and generates a High alarm. The signal must fall below 85.0 (90.0 minus 5.0) for the alarm to
clear.
3 Process variable fail deadband. Type the deadband (hysteresis) that is applied to each alarm limit.
Deadband helps prevent a noisy signal from generating numerous spurious alarms.
Example: If the High alarm limit is 90.0 and the High alarm deadband is 5, once the signal rises above
90.0 and generates a High alarm. The signal must fall below 85.0 (90.0 minus 5.0) for the alarm to
clear.
4 Process variable fail threshold in raw units.

86 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 I/O Processing Family Chapter 3

Table 57 - Maintenance Tab Page 3 Description

Item Description
1 Process variable high rate of change threshold. Type the threshold (trip point) for the rate of change
alarm.
2 Process variable high rate of change deadband. Type the deadband (hysteresis) that is applied to each
alarm limit. Deadband helps prevent a noisy signal from generating numerous spurious alarms.
Example: If the High alarm limit is 90.0 and the High alarm deadband is 5, once the signal rises above
90.0 and generates a High alarm. The signal must fall below 85.0 (90.0 minus 5.0) for the alarm to
clear.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 87

Chapter 3 I/O Processing Family

Advanced Properties Display

The Advanced Properties Display provides access to device configuration

parameters and ranges, and options for device and I/O setup. The engineering
tab and the HMI configuration tab are reached from the Advanced Properties
Display. This tab is used for initial system commissioning or later system
changes.

Engineering Tab

Use the engineering tab to configure the Process Variable unit for the device.

1
6

3
4

Table 58 - Engineering Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Input (unscaled) minimum and maximum
These parameters must be set to the range of the signal that is connected to the Inp_Process Variable
Input. The raw minimum default is 0.0 and the raw maximum default is 100.0.
Example: If your input card provides a signal from 4.0…20.0mA, set Cfg_InpRawMin to 4.0 and
Cfg_InpRawMax to 20.0. The raw minimum/maximum and engineering units minimum/maximum are
used for scaling to engineering units.
2 Check to allow the Substitute Process Variable Maintenance function.
Clear this checkbox to disallow the Substitute Process Variable Maintenance function (default).
3 Check to use the square root characterization for a differential pressure input to read flow.
Clear this checkbox (default) to use linear scaling.
4 Check to enable target entry, deviation calculations, display, and alarms.

88 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 I/O Processing Family Chapter 3

Table 58 - Engineering Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
5 Check to enable Rate of Change calculations, display, and alarms.
6 EU minimum and maximum for scaling
These parameters must be set to match the Process Variable range of the input signal that is connected to
Inp_PV. The Process Variable engineering units minimum default is 0.0 and the Process Variable
engineering units maximum is 100.0.
Example: If your input card provides a signal from 4…20 mA that represents -50…250 °C, set
Cfg_PVEUMIN to -50.0 and Cfg_PVEU maximum to 250.0.
The raw minimum/maximum and Process Variable engineering units minimum/maximum are used for
scaling to engineering units.
7 Type engineering units for display on the HMI.

Table 59 - Engineering Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 PV Source and Quality
Generate SrcQ: This instruction determines the Process Variable quality using Inp_PVBad,
Inp_PVUncertain, and the PV value (out of range, infinite or not a number)

Pass thru connected Channel’s SrcQ value: This instruction uses the Source and Quality (SrcQ) value
that is provided by an upstream object (such as P_AIChan) via Inp_PVSrcQ to determine the PV source
and quality.
2 Check the appropriate time base for seconds, minutes, or hours.
3 Type the time in seconds for the process variable filter time constant.
4 Process variable rate of change time base in units.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 89

Chapter 3 I/O Processing Family

HMI Configuration Tab

See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for the description of the common
attributes.

2
1

Table 60 - HMI Configuration Tab Description

Item Description
1 Check to enable navigation to an upstream channel object (for example, P_AIChan).
IMPORTANT: The name of the Channel object in the controller must be the name of the object with the
suffix ‘_Chan’. For example, if your P_AInAdv object has the name ‘AInAdv123’, then its Channel object
must be named ‘AInAdv123_Chan’.
2 Set the number of decimal places for the Process Variable.

90 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 I/O Processing Family Chapter 3

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications to diagnose device problems. This tab
includes specific reasons a device is 'Not Ready', device warnings and faults,
warning and fault history, and predictive/preventive maintenance data. The
initial faceplate shows the raw input process variable.

Click the raw input button to open the analog channel quality faceplate. This
tab provides an overview of the process variable. For more information on the
analog channel faceplate, See Analog Input Channel (P_AIChan) on page 92.

Alarms Tab

The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the
alarms page changes color to show the current active alarm status. A blinking
alarm icon indicates that one or more alarms must be acknowledged or the
device must be reset. See Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm) on page 51 for
more information.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 91

Chapter 3 I/O Processing Family

Analog Input Channel The P_AIChan Add-On Instruction monitors one analog input channel and
provides one configurable alarm. This instruction is associated with other
(P_AIChan) instructions.

Display Elements

The P_AIChan instruction is used in association with other device

instructions to provide input monitoring functions. There are no dedicated
display elements for this instruction. The P_AIChan faceplate is called from
other faceplates.

Operator Tab

The faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status.

The Operator tab shows the following information:

• Current Process Variable value in raw and engineering units
• Process Variable status
• Input Source and Quality indicator

92 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 I/O Processing Family Chapter 3

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters. The following faceplate shows an example of
the maintenance tab.

3
4

The following table shows the functions on the Maintenance tab.

Table 61 - Maintenance Tab Descriptions
Item Description
1 Type the thresholds that are considered out of range (failed).
If the Process Variable is greater than or equal to the high threshold, it is considered out of range.
If the Process Variable is less than or equal to the low threshold for the on-delay time, it is considered
out of range.
2 Type the deadband to use with the out-of-range thresholds. If the Process Variable is less than the
high threshold minus the deadband and the Process Variable is greater than the low threshold plus
the deadband for the off-delay time, it is considered in range (not failed). The deadband must be
greater than or equal to zero.
3 Type the high clamping limit for the Process Variable. This value clamps (limits) the Process Variable
so it does not exceed this value.
IMPORTANT: Out-of-Range detection uses the Process Variable value before clamping. This entry
does not affect Out-of-Range detection.
4 Type the low clamping limit for the Process Variable. This value clamps (limits) the Process Variable so
it does not go below this value.
IMPORTANT: Out-of-Range detection uses the Process Variable value before clamping. This entry
does not affect Out-of-Range detection.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 93

Chapter 3 I/O Processing Family

Advanced Properties Display

The Advanced Properties Display provides access to device configuration

parameters and ranges, and options for device and I/O setup. The advanced
maintenance, engineering, and the HMI configuration tabs can be reached
from the Advanced Properties Display. This tab is used for initial system
commissioning or later system changes.

Advanced Maintenance Tab

2
3

Table 62 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type the value to output as the process variable when a condition occurs that has its action set to
‘Replace’.
2 Type the amount of time the input must stay within the range thresholds (with deadband) to clear the
Out of Range (fail) condition. The off-delay time is used to help prevent a chattering fail detection on a
noisy signal near a range threshold.
3 Type the amount of time the input must stay beyond a range threshold to cause an Out of Range (fail)
condition. The on-delay time is used to avoid an unnecessary fail detection when the input only
momentarily exceeds the threshold.
4 Type the amount of time the input must remain unchanged to trigger a stuck input condition. A value
of zero means the input must change every instruction scan to avoid a stuck input condition. Type a
large value to disable stuck input detection.

94 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 I/O Processing Family Chapter 3

Engineering Tab

The engineering tab is divided into two pages. On this tab, configure the
Process Variable quality settings.

1 4

2 5

Table 63 - Engineering Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Type the Process Variable range of the input signal that is connected to Inp_PV. The Process Variable
engineering units minimum default is 0.0 and the Process Variable engineering units maximum is
100.0.
EXAMPLE: If your input card provides a signal from 4…20 mA that represents -50…250 °C, set
Cfg_PVEUMin to -50.0 and Cfg_PVEUMax to 250.0.
The Raw Min/Max and Process Variable engineering units Min/Max are used for scaling to
engineering units.
2 Type the units of measure for the input signal. “mA DC” is the default.
3 Check to trigger a failure condition and alarm when the Process Variable status is either Bad or
Uncertain.
Clear this checkbox to trigger the failure condition when only the Process Variable status is Bad.
4 Type the Process Variable range of the input signal that is connected to Inp_PV. The Process Variable
engineering units minimum default is 0.0 and the Process Variable engineering units maximum is
100.0.
EXAMPLE: If your input card provides a signal from 4…20 mA that represents -50…250 °C, set
Cfg_PVEUMin to -50.0 and Cfg_PVEUMax to 250.0.
The Raw Min/Max and Process Variable engineering units Min/Max are used for scaling to
engineering units.
5 Type the engineering units for display on the HMI. Percent (%) is the default.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 95

Chapter 3 I/O Processing Family

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Table 64 - Engineering Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Action:
When the P_AInChan configuration is not valid:
• Use the input to determine value
• Hold value at its last good value
• Set value by using Cfg_PVReplaceVal

Quality:
When the P_ configuration is not valid:
• Set Sts_PVGood
• Set Sts_PVUncertain
• Set Sts_PVBad
2 Action:
When there is a channel fault:
• Use the input to determine value
• Hold value at its last good value
• Set value by using Cfg_PVReplaceVal

Quality:
When there is a channel fault:
• Set Sts_PVGood
• Set Sts_PVUncertain
• Set Sts_PVBad

96 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 I/O Processing Family Chapter 3

Table 64 - Engineering Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
3 Action:
When there is a module fault:
• Use the input to determine value
• Hold value at its last good value
• Set value by using Cfg_PVReplaceVal

Quality:
When there is a module fault:
• Set Sts_PVGood
• Set Sts_PVUncertain
• Set Sts_PVBad
4 Action:
When the input is not a number:
• Use the input to determine value
• Hold value at its last good value
• Set value by using Cfg_PVReplaceVal

Quality:
When the input is not a number:
• Set Sts_PVGood
• Set Sts_PVUncertain
• Set Sts_PVBad
5 Action:
When the input is out of range:
• Use the input to determine value
• Hold value at its last good value
• Set value by using Cfg_PVReplaceVal

Quality:
When the input is out of range:
• Set Sts_PVGood
• Set Sts_PVUncertain
• Set Sts_PVBad
6 Action:
• Use the input to determine value
• Hold value at its last good value
Set value by using Cfg_PVReplaceVal

Quality:
When the input is out of spec:
• Set Sts_PVGood
• Set Sts_PVUncertain
• Set Sts_PVBad
7 Action:
When Inp_FuncCheck is set:
• Use the input to determine value
• Hold value at its last good value
• Set value by using Cfg_PVReplaceVal

Quality:
When Inp_FuncCheck is set:
• Set Sts_PVGood
• Set Sts_PVUncertain
• Set Sts_PVBad

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 97

Chapter 3 I/O Processing Family

Table 64 - Engineering Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
8 Action:
When the input is stuck
(no change):
• Use the input to determine value
• Hold value at its last good value
• Set value by using Cfg_PVReplaceVal

Quality:
When the input is stuck
(no change):
• Set Sts_PVGood
• Set Sts_PVUncertain
• Set Sts_PVBad
9 Action:
When Inp_MaintReqd is set:
• Use the input to determine value
• Hold value at its last good value
• Set value by using Cfg_PVReplaceVal

Quality:
When Inp_MaintReqd is set:
• Set Sts_PVGood
• Set Sts_PVUncertain
• Set Sts_PVBad

HMI Configuration Tab

Configure the description, label, tag, and security area for the device.

The HMI configuration tab provides access to displayed text, and faceplate-to-
faceplate navigation settings. Configure the description, label, tag, and security
area for the device. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for the
description of the common attributes.

Alarms Tab

The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the
alarms page changes color to show the current active alarm status. A blinking
alarm icon indicates that one or more alarms must be acknowledged or the
device must be reset. See Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm) on page 51 for
more information.

98 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 I/O Processing Family Chapter 3

Dual Sensor Analog Input The P_AInDual (Dual Analog Input) Add-On Instruction monitors one
analog Process Variable by using two analog input signals (dual sensors, dual
(P_AInDual) transmitters, and dual-input channels). The Add-On Instruction has the same
basic features as P_AIn. See Basic Analog Input (P_AIn) on page 78.

Display Elements
Dual Sensor Analog Input (P_AInDual) uses the same display elements a
P_AIn. See Basic Analog Input (P_AIn) on page 78 for the display elements.

Operator Tab
The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator command source.

1 5
6

Table 65 - Operator Tab Description

Item Description
1 Click to select Sensor A Input Process Variable.
2 Click to select the maximum of Sensor A and Sensor B Input Process Variable.
3 Click to select the minimum of Sensor A and Sensor B Input Process Variable.
4 Click to select Sensor B Input Process Variable.
5 Clear the minimum / maximum extents of the capture.
6 Click to select the average of Sensor A and Sensor B input Process Variables.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 99

Chapter 3 I/O Processing Family

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot and temporarily work around
device problems. The maintenance tab for the P_AInDual Add-On
Instruction has two pages. The first page contains the threshold and deadband
information for the high and low limits and is the same as the P_AIn Add-On
Instruction. See Basic Analog Input (P_AIn) on page 78. Additional
information for this instruction on page 2 can be seen in the following
diagram.

Table 66 - Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Process variable high/low signal difference threshold. Type the threshold (trip point) for analog input
alarms.
2 Process variable deadband. Type the deadband (hysteresis) that is applied to the alarm limit. Deadband
helps prevent a noisy signal from generating numerous spurious alarms.
Example: If the High alarm limit is 90.0 and the High alarm deadband is 5, once the signal rises above
90.0 and generates a High alarm. The signal must fall below 85.0 (90.0 minus 5.0) for the alarm to
clear.
3 Process variable fail deadband. Type the deadband (hysteresis) that is applied to each alarm limit.
Deadband helps prevent a noisy signal from generating numerous spurious alarms.
Example: If the High alarm limit is 90.0 and the High alarm deadband is 5, once the signal rises above
90.0 and generates a High alarm. The signal must fall below 85.0 (90.0 minus 5.0) for the alarm to
clear.
4 Process variable high/low fail threshold in raw units.

100 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 I/O Processing Family Chapter 3

Advanced Properties Display

The Advanced Properties Display provides access to device configuration

parameters and ranges, and options for device and I/O setup. The engineering
tab and the HMI configuration tab can be reached from the Advanced
Properties Display. This tab is used for initial system commissioning or later
system changes.

Engineering Tab

Use the engineering tab to configure the Process Variable unit for the device.

1
5

Table 67 - Engineering Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Input (unscaled) minimum and maximum
These parameters must be set to the range of the signal that is connected to the Inp_Process Variable
Input. The raw minimum default is 0.0 and the raw maximum default is 100.0.
Example: If your input card provides a signal from 4.0…20.0mA, set Cfg_InpRawMin to 4.0 and
Cfg_InpRawMax to 20.0. The raw minimum/maximum and engineering units minimum/maximum are
used for scaling to engineering units.
2 Check to allow the Substitute Process Variable Maintenance function.
Clear this checkbox to disallow the Substitute Process Variable Maintenance function (default).
3 PV Source and Quality Input A
Generate SrcQ: This instruction determines the Process Variable quality using Inp_PVBad,
Inp_PVUncertain, and the PV value (out of range, infinite or not a number)

Pass thru connected Channel’s SrcQ value: This instruction uses the Source and Quality (SrcQ) value
that is provided by an upstream object (such as P_AIChan) via Inp_PVSrcQ to determine the PV source
and quality.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 101

Chapter 3 I/O Processing Family

Item Description
4 PV Source and Quality Input B
Generate SrcQ: This instruction determines the Process Variable quality using Inp_PVBad,
Inp_PVUncertain, and the PV value (out of range, infinite or not a number)

Pass thru connected Channel’s SrcQ value: This instruction uses the Source and Quality (SrcQ) value
that is provided by an upstream object (such as P_AIChan) via Inp_PVSrcQ to determine the PV source
and quality.
5 EU minimum and maximum for scaling
These parameters must be set to match the Process Variable range of the input signal that is connected
to Inp_PV. The Process Variable engineering units minimum default is 0.0 and the Process Variable
engineering units maximum is 100.0.
Example: If your input card provides a signal from 4…20 mA that represents -50…250 °C, set
Cfg_PVEUMIN to -50.0 and Cfg_PVEU maximum to 250.0.
The raw minimum/maximum and Process Variable engineering units minimum/maximum are used for
scaling to engineering units.
6 Type engineering units for display on the HMI.

Table 68 - Engineering Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Type the time in seconds for the process variable filter time constant.

102 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 I/O Processing Family Chapter 3

HMI Configuration Tab

Configure the description, label, tag, and security area for the device.

See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for the description of the common
attributes.

3
4

5
1

Table 69 - HMI Configuration Description

Item Description
1 Check to enable navigation to an upstream channel object (for example, P_AIChan).
IMPORTANT: The name of the Channel object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_ChanA’. For example, if your P_AInDual object has the name ‘AInDual123’, then its
Channel object must be named ‘AInDual123_ChanA’.
2 Check to enable navigation to an upstream channel object (for example, P_AIChan).
IMPORTANT: The name of the Channel object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_ChanB’. For example, if your P_AInDual object has the name ’AInDual123’, then its
Channel object must be named ‘AInDual123_ChanB’.
3 Type the name for Input Tag A to show on the faceplate and Tooltip.
IMPORTANT: Pause the mouse over the field to display a tool tip with the configured Logix tag/path.
4 Type the name for Input Tag B to show on the faceplate and Tooltip.
IMPORTANT: Pause the mouse over the field to display a tool tip with the configured Logix tag/path.
5 Set the number of decimal places for the Process Variable.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 103

Chapter 3 I/O Processing Family

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications to diagnose device problems. This tab
includes specific reasons a device is 'Not Ready', device warnings and faults,
warning and fault history, and predictive/preventive maintenance data. The
initial faceplate shows the raw input process variable.

Click the raw input button to open the analog channel quality faceplate. This
tab provides an overview of the process variable. For more information on the
analog channel faceplate, See Analog Input Channel (P_AIChan) on page 92.

Alarms Tab

The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the
alarms page changes color to show the current active alarm status. A blinking
alarm icon indicates that one or more alarms must be acknowledged or the
device must be reset. See Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm) on page 51 for
more information.

104 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 I/O Processing Family Chapter 3

Multiple Analog Input The P_AInMulti (Multiple Analog Input) Add-On Instruction monitors one
analog process variable (Process Variable) by using up to eight analog input
(P_AInMulti) signals (sensors, transmitters, input channels).The Add-On Instruction has
the same basic features as P_AIn. See Basic Analog Input (P_AIn) on
page 78.

Display Elements

A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced

multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix system, aid consistency and save engineering time.
Table 70 - P_AInMulti Display Elements Description
Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_P_AInMulti_8V The object displays eight inputs (A-H),
with each input a moving line on a
horizontal axis. The graphic display
includes indicators for disabled and
rejected inputs.

GO_P_AInMulti_6V The object displays six inputs (A-F),

with each input a moving line on a
horizontal axis. The graphic display
includes indicators for disabled and
rejected inputs.

GO_P_AInMulti_4V The object displays four inputs (A-D),

with each input a moving line on a
horizontal axis. The graphic display
includes indicators for disabled and
rejected inputs.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 105

Chapter 3 I/O Processing Family

Table 70 - P_AInMulti Display Elements Description

Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_P_AInMulti_8H The object displays eight inputs (A-H),
with each input a moving line on a
vertical axis. The graphic display
includes indicators for disabled and
rejected inputs.

106 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 I/O Processing Family Chapter 3

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator command source.

Table 71 - Operator Tab Description

Item Description
1 Process Variable
2 Clear minimum/maximum extents of the capture
3 Display of the input signals that are being rejected.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 107

Chapter 3 I/O Processing Family

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot and temporarily work around
device problems. The maintenance tab for the P_AInMulti Add-On
Instruction has three pages. The first page contains the threshold and
deadband information for the high and low limits and is the same as the P_AIn
Add-On Instruction. See Basic Analog Input (P_AIn) on page 78. Additional
information for this instruction on page 2 and three can be seen in the
following diagram.

1
3

Table 72 - Maintenance Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Click a threshold name to open the associated P_Gate faceplate.
2 Input failure status high/low threshold.
3 Type the deadband (hysteresis) that is applied to each alarm limit. Deadband helps prevent a noisy
signal from generating numerous spurious alarms.
EXAMPLE: If the High Alarm Limit is 90.0 and the High Alarm deadband is 5, once the signal rises
above 90.0 and generates a High Alarm. The signal must fall below 85.0 (90.0 minus 5.0) for the alarm
to clear.

108 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 I/O Processing Family Chapter 3

Table 73 - Maintenance Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Sensor inputs. Check:
• ON if the corresponding input is to be used to calculate the final Process Variable (average or
median).
• OFF to exclude the corresponding input from the Process Variable calculation.
This configuration is typically used to exclude a particular input when it is taken out of service for
maintenance. If the P_AInMulti instruction has a Process Variable but is not using it, the Maintenance
Bypass Indicator is displayed.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 109

Chapter 3 I/O Processing Family

Advanced Properties Display

The Advanced Properties Display provides access to device configuration

parameters and ranges, and options for device and I/O setup. The engineering
tab and the HMI configuration tab can be reached from the Advanced
Properties Display. This tab is used for initial system commissioning or later
system changes.

Engineering Tab

The engineering tab is divided into three pages.

1 5

6
2

Table 74 - Engineering Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Enter these parameters within the range of the signal that is connected to the Inp_PV Input. The Raw
Min default is 0.0 and the Raw Max default is 100.0.
EXAMPLE: If your input card provides a signal from 4.0…20.0mA, set Cfg_InpRawMin to 4.0 and
Cfg_InpRawMax to 20.0. The Raw minimum/maximum and engineering units minimum/maximum
are used for scaling to engineering units.
2 Check to set this parameter:
• ON, if the corresponding Process Variable Input is to be used to calculate final Process Variable
(average or median)
• OFF, to exclude the corresponding Process Variable Input from the Process Variable calculation
TIP: This configuration determines whether a particular input is intended to be wired and used. See the
Maintenance tab for functions to take an input out of service for maintenance temporarily.
3 Check to set this parameter to one of the following:
• OFF to allow the Substitute Process Variable Maintenance function (default).
• ON to disallow the Substitute Process Variable Maintenance function.
4 Check to set this parameter to one of the following:
• ON, an input that is flagged as uncertain is rejected and not used to calculate the final Process
Variable.
• OFF, an input that is flagged as uncertain is not rejected and is still used to calculate the final Process
Variable. The flag causes the final Process Variable to be flagged as uncertain (default).

110 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 I/O Processing Family Chapter 3

Item Description
5 Enter these parameters within the Process Variable range of the input signal that is connected to
Inp_PVA and Inp_PVB. The Process Variable engineering units minimum default is 0.0 and the Process
Variable engineering units maximum is 100.0.
EXAMPLE: If your input card provides a signal from 4…20 mA that represents -50…250 °C, set
Cfg_PVEUMIN to -50.0 and Cfg_PVEUMax to 250.0.
The Raw Min/Max and Process Variable engineering units Min/Max are used for scaling to engineering
Units.
6 Enter the engineering units for display on the HMI. Percent (%) is the default.
7 Type the number of unrejected Process Variable inputs that are required to have the final Process
Variable value show good quality.

Table 75 - Engineering Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Click:
• 'Outside of rejection region' to reject an input that is more than two standard deviations from the
mean.
• 'Outside of mean +/-' to reject an input that deviates from the mean by more than the value
entered. Value is in PV engineering units.
IMPORTANT: At least four inputs must be used for the 'Outside of rejection region' selection to be
meaningful.
2 Click:
• 'Average of good inputs' - the calculated final Process Variable is the average (arithmetic mean) of
the good (non-rejected) Process Variable inputs.
• 'Median of good inputs' - the calculated final Process Variable is the median (central value) of the
good (non-rejected) Process Variable inputs (default).
The average is the sum of values that are divided by the number of values.
The median is the value of the item in the middle. If there are an even number of items, the median is
the average of the two central values.
3 Click one of the options to determine the output calculation when there are only two unrejected inputs.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 111

Chapter 3 I/O Processing Family

Table 76 - Engineering Tab Page 3 Description

Item Description
1 This parameter sets the filter time constant for the first-order (lag) filter applied to the Process Variable.
The filter is applied after scaling and before alarm checking and Process Variable display as Val.

112 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 I/O Processing Family Chapter 3

HMI Configuration Tab

Configure the description, label, tag, and security area for the device. See Basic
Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for the description of the common attributes.
The HMI Configuration has two tabs for this object.

Table 77 - HMI Configuration Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Type the number of decimal places to show for the Process Variable.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 113

Chapter 3 I/O Processing Family

1 2

Table 78 - HMI Configuration Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Check to enable navigation to an upstream channel object (for example, P_AIChan).
IMPORTANT: The name of the Channel object in the controller must be the name of the object with the
suffix ‘_Chan’ plus the input letter (A…H). This restriction applies to each of the eight channels
(A…H). For example, if your P_AInMulti object has the name’AInMulti123’, then its
Channel A object must be named ‘AInMulti123_ChanA’.
2 Set the number of decimal places for the Process Variable.

114 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 I/O Processing Family Chapter 3

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides raw input process variables and the scaled process
variable from the inputs.

Alarms Tab
The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the
alarms page changes color to show the current active alarm status. A blinking
alarm icon indicates that one or more alarms must be acknowledged or the
device must be reset. See Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm) on page 51 for
more information.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 115

Chapter 3 I/O Processing Family

Discrete Input (P_DIn) The P_DIn (Discrete Input) Add-On Instruction is used to receive and process
one discrete condition (the Process Variable or Process Variable), typically for a
channel of a discrete input card. It can be used with any discrete (BOOL)
signal.

Display Elements
A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced
multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix system, aid consistency and save engineering time.
Table 79 - P_DIn Display Elements Description
Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_P_DIn Global object with label.

GO_P_DIn1 Global object without label.

116 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 I/O Processing Family Chapter 3

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator command source.

Table 80 - Operator Tab Description

Item Description
1 Current Process Variable
2 Target Process Variable

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 117

Chapter 3 I/O Processing Family

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot, temporarily work around device
problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance.

1 3

Table 81 - Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Current Process Variable
2 Click to enable the use of the Substitute Process Variable.
3 Target Process Variable
4 Gate condition
5 Target status
6 Click to choose Process Variable to be used.

Click Gate Condition to open the P_Gate faceplate. From the P_Gate
faceplate, you can configure and perform additional operations for each alarm,
including Gate Delay, Status On-delay, Status Off-delay, and condition text.

See Condition Gate Delay (P_Gate) on page 35

118 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 I/O Processing Family Chapter 3

Advanced Properties Display

The Advanced Properties Display provides access to device configuration

parameters and ranges, and options for device and I/O setup. The Advanced
Maintenance, Engineering, and HMI configuration tabs can be reached from
the Advanced Properties Display. This tab is used for initial system
commissioning or later system changes.

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Table 82 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Minimum time the Process Variable must maintain the state, in seconds.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 119

Chapter 3 I/O Processing Family

Engineering Tab

The engineering tab provides access to device configuration parameters and

ranges, options for device and I/O setup, displayed text, and
faceplate-to-faceplate navigation settings, for initial system commissioning or
later system changes.

Table 83 - Engineering Tab Description

Item Description
1 Check to enable the substitute Process Variable feature.

120 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 I/O Processing Family Chapter 3

HMI Configuration Tab

Configure the description, label, tag, and security area for the device. See Basic
Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for the description of the common attributes.

2
3

Table 84 - HMI Configuration Description

Item Description
1 Check to display state text in normal state
2 Type text to display in PV 0 State.
3 Type text to display in PV 1 State.

Alarms Tab

The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the
alarms page changes color to show the current active alarm status. A blinking
alarm icon indicates that one or more alarms must be acknowledged or the
device must be reset. See Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm) on page 51 for
more information.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 121

Chapter 3 I/O Processing Family

Discrete Output (P_DOut) The Discrete Output (P_DOut) Add-On Instruction controls a device by one
discrete output signal and optionally monitors feedback from the device to
check for device failures. The P_DOut instruction operates in various
command sources, and can provide steady, single pulsed, or continually pulsed
output.

Display Elements

A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced

multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix system, aid consistency and save time.
Table 85 - P_DOut Display Elements Description
Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_P_DOut Digital (2-state) device display
element for use on overview and
detail displays.

122 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 I/O Processing Family Chapter 3

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator command source.

1
2

3 6

4 7

Table 86 - Operator Tab Description

Item Description
1 Feedback Indicator
2 Discrete Output Indicator
3 Output 'Off' Button
4 Single Pulse 'Off' Button
5 Continuous Pulse Button
6 Output 'On' Button
7 Single Pulse 'On' Button

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 123

Chapter 3 I/O Processing Family

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot, temporarily work around device
problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance.

1
2

Table 87 - Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Check if the instruction uses the Off device feedback to check for failure.
2 Check if the instruction uses the On device feedback to check for failure.
3 Check if bypassable interlocks and permissives are bypassed in override command source.

124 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 I/O Processing Family Chapter 3

Advanced Properties Display

The Advanced Properties Display provides access to device configuration

parameters and ranges, and options for device and I/O setup. The Advanced
Maintenance, Engineering, and HMI configuration tabs can be reached from
the Advanced Properties Display. This tab is used for initial system
commissioning or later system changes.

Advanced Maintenance Tab

4
2
5

6
3

Table 88 - Advanced Property Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type the amount of time to allow for the device to get feedback for the Off setting before setting a fault.
2 Type the amount of time before the output deactivates.
3 Type the amount of time to trigger a pulse when the device deactivates.
4 Type the amount of time to allow for the device to get feedback for the On setting before setting a fault.
5 Type the amount of time before the output activates.
6 Type the amount of time to trigger a pulse when the device deactivates.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 125

Chapter 3 I/O Processing Family

Engineering Tab

The engineering tab provides access to device configuration parameters and

ranges, options for device and I/O setup, displayed text, and faceplate-to-
faceplate navigation settings. This tab is also used for initial system
commissioning or later system changes.

1
2
3

4
5

6
7

8
9

Table 89 - Engineering Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Check to configure the instruction to use Off feedback signals from the device.
2 Check to configure the instruction to use On feedback signals from the device.
3 Click to Enable fault when both feedback inputs are either ON or OFF.
4 Check to reset a fault upon an operator command.
Clear this checkbox to reset faults by using only the reset code.
5 Check to reset a fault upon an external command.
Clear this checkbox to reset faults by using only the reset code.
6 Check to enable the pulsing functions.
7 Check if bypassable interlocks and permissives are bypassed in override command source.
8 Check to make the Operator Off command available in any command source. Clear this checkbox to
make the Operator Off command available only in Operator or Maintenance command source.
9 Check to make the External Off command available in any command source. Clear this checkbox to
make the External Off command available only in Operator or Maintenance command source.

126 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 I/O Processing Family Chapter 3

2
3
4

Table 90 - Engineering Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Check to finish pulse when commanded ON or OFF.
2 Check to de-energize the output to the device and return the device to its fail position, when an I/O
Fault condition occurs.
Clear this checkbox to keep the output to the device in its current stat on an I/O Fault condition.
IMPORTANT: If a condition is configured to shed the device to the Off state on a fault, a reset is required
to clear the shed fault. This reset commands the device to a state other than Off.
3 Check to de-energize the output to the device, return it to its fail position, when a Position Fail
condition occurs.
Clear this checkbox to keep the output to the device in its current state (keep trying) on a Position Fail
condition.
IMPORTANT: If a condition is configured to shed the device to the Off state on a fault, a reset is required
to clear the shed fault. This reset commands the device to a state other than Off.
4 The device outputs are always de-energized on an Interlock Trip. This item cannot be unchecked. It is
displayed as a reminder that the Interlock Trip function always de-energizes the device.
5 Sets the time delay (in seconds) for the On or Off status to be echoed back when Simulation is enabled
or when On and Off feedbacks are not used.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 127

Chapter 3 I/O Processing Family

HMI Configuration Tab

Configure the description, label, tag, and security area for the device. See Basic
Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for the description of the common attributes.

3
4

1
2

Table 91 - HMI Configuration Descriptions

Item Description
1 Check if a permissive instruction is used with this device. This check changes the Permissive indicator to
a clickable button to open the Permissive faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Permissive object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix '_Perm'. For example, if your P_DOut object has the name 'DOut123', then its Permissive
object must be named 'DOut123_Perm'.
2 Check if an interlock instruction is used with this device. This check changes the Interlock indicator to a
clickable button to open the Interlock faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the interlock object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix '_Intlk'. For example, if your P_DOut object has the name 'DOut123', then its interlock object
must be named 'DOut123_Intlk'.
3 Type text to display when device is in Off (0) state.
4 Type text to display when device is in On (1) state.

128 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 I/O Processing Family Chapter 3

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications that are helpful to diagnose or help
prevent device problems. The device problems can include specific reasons a
device is 'Not Ready', device warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and
predictive/preventive maintenance data.

The Diagnostics tab displays possible reasons for the device not being ready.
See Diagnostics Tab on page 28

Alarms Tab
The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the
alarms page changes color to show the current active alarm status. A blinking
alarm icon indicates that one or more alarms must be acknowledged or the
device must be reset. See Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm) on page 51 for
more information.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 129

Chapter 3 I/O Processing Family

Analog Output (P_AOut) The P_AOut (Analog Output) Add-On Instruction is used to manipulate an
analog output to control a field device, such as a control valve or a motorized
gate positioner. The output responds to an Operator (manual) or Program
setting of the Controlled Variable (CV) signal.

The P_AOut instruction controls the analog output in various command

sources (Operator, Program, Override, Maintenance, Hand), monitoring for
fault conditions.

Display Elements

A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced

multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix system, aid consistency and save engineering time.
Table 92 - P_AOut Display Elements Description
Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_P_AOut Standard analog-output global
object.

GO_ProcessControlValve Normal controlled valve symbol

for horizontal pipe.

GO_ProcessControlValve1 Inverted controlled valve

symbol for horizontal pipe.

GO_ProcessControlValve2 Controlled valve symbol for

vertical pipe (pipe to the left).

GO_ProcessControlValve3 Controlled valve symbol for

vertical pipe (pipe to the right).

130 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 I/O Processing Family Chapter 3

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator command source.

1
4
2

Table 93 - Operator Tab Description

Item Description
1 Analog Output State (At Target, Ramping Down, Ramping Up, Clamped at Min, Clamped at Max, or
Disabled).
2 Control Variable target.
3 Type to change the Controlled Variable output value.
4 Control Variable.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 131

Chapter 3 I/O Processing Family

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot and temporarily work around
device problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance.

Table 94 - Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Click YES to bypass checking of bypassable interlocks and permissives.
2 Type the CV value above which the device shows as 'Active'. When Val_CVOut is greater than this value,
Sts_Active is set to 1, and the HMI shows the graphic symbol in the active state (for example, control
valve shown as Open). When Val_CVOut is less than or equal to this value, Sts_Active is set to 0, and
the HMI shows the graphic symbol in the inactive state (for example, control valve shown as Closed).
3 Type the Rate of Change Limit for increasing the Control Variable.
4 Type the Rate of Change Limit for decreasing the Control Variable.
5 Displays the interlocks faceplate P_Intlk.

132 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 I/O Processing Family Chapter 3

Advanced Properties Display

The Advanced Properties Display provides access to device configuration

parameters and ranges, and options for device and I/O setup. The advanced
maintenance, engineering tab, and the HMI configuration tab can be reached
from the Advanced Properties Display. This tab is used for initial system
commissioning or later system changes.

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Table 95 - Advanced Properties Display Description

Item Description
1 Controlled Variable clamp limits. Type the clamping limits for the Controlled Variable in engineering
units.
Clamp limits are enforced in Operator and Program command sources only.
2 Type the maximum allowed value for the Rate of Change Limit in engineering units per second.
A value of zero allows any rate of change to be input by the Program or Operator.
3 Type the Operator command source Controlled Variable Target in engineering units.
This entry is available in Operator command source and Maintenance command source.
4 Check and the Controlled Variable holds at the last good value when an Interlock trips or an I/O Fault
occurs.
Clear this checkbox and the Controlled Variable goes to the Interlock Controlled Variable value when an
Interlock trips or an I/O Fault occurs.
5 Type the interlock target Controlled Variable in engineering units.
This value is used for the Controlled Variable when interlocked or on an I/O Fault, but only if Hold Last
Good Value is not selected.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 133

Chapter 3 I/O Processing Family

Engineering Tab

The engineering tab provides access to device configuration parameters and

ranges, options for device and I/O setup, displayed text, and faceplate-to-
faceplate navigation settings. This tab is also used for initial system
commissioning or later system changes.

1 7

3
4
5

Table 96 - Engineering Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Type values for the maximum and minimum scaled (engineering units) scaling ranges.
2 When checked, the operator settings track the program settings when the command source is Program,
and program settings track the operator settings when the command source is Operator. Transition
between command sources is bumpless.
When not checked, the operator settings and program settings retain their values regardless of
command source. When the command source is changed, the value of a limit can change, such as from
the Program-set value to the Operator-set value.
3 When checked, the Program and Operator Settings of the CV track the output CV when the command
source is Hand or Override.
4 Check while in Override command source to bypass Interlocks that can be bypassed.
5 Check to have the CV immediately go to its target value or configured Interlock CV value when an
Interlock trips or the instruction is placed in Maintenance or Override command source.
Clear this checkbox to have the CV always use rate of change limiting (ramping) of the CV output.
6 Engineering Units label.
7 Type values for the maximum and minimum output (Raw) scaling ranges.

134 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 I/O Processing Family Chapter 3

1
2

3
4

Table 97 - Engineering Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Check so that an I/O Fault triggers a shed of the output, to the configured shed set value or to hold last
good output. The shed condition is latched internal to the Add-On Instruction. When the I/O Fault
condition clears, a Reset command is required to return to normal operation.
Clear this checkbox so that the I/O Fault condition does not affect operation (but can still generate an
alarm).
2 This selection cannot be changed. The configured shed action always takes place on an interlock trip.
3 Choose this option to set the analog output to the configured shed set value when a condition
configured as a shed trigger occurs.
4 Choose this option to hold the analog output at its last good value when a condition configured as a
shed trigger occurs.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 135

Chapter 3 I/O Processing Family

HMI Configuration Tab

Configure the description, label, tag, and security area for the device. See Basic
Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for the description of the common attributes.

Table 98 - HMI Configuration Description

Item Description
1 Check if an interlock object is connected to Inp_IntlkOK. The Interlock indicator becomes a button that
opens the P_Intlk faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Interlock object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_Intlk’. For example, if your P_AOut object has the name ‘AOut123’, then its Interlock object
must be named ‘AOut123_Intlk.
2 Check to enable navigation to the faceplate for the PlantPAx® object that is providing the CV for this
object (PSet_CV).
3 Set the number of decimal places for the Control Variable.

136 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 I/O Processing Family Chapter 3

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications that are helpful to diagnose or help
prevent device problems. The device problems can include specific reasons a
device is 'Not Ready', device warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and
predictive/preventive maintenance data.

The Diagnostics tab displays possible reasons for the device not being ready.
See Diagnostics Tab on page 28

Alarms Tab
The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the
alarms page changes color to show the current active alarm status. A blinking
alarm icon indicates that one or more alarms must be acknowledged or the
device must be reset. See Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm) on page 51 for
more information.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 137

Chapter 3 I/O Processing Family

Pressure/Temperature The Pressure/Temperature Compensated Flow (P_PTComp) Add-On

Instruction is used to calculate a flow at standard temperature and pressure.
Compensated Flow This Add-On Instruction essentially calculates a mass flow rate when given a
(P_PTComp) volumetric flow rate or differential pressure measurement. This instruction also
requires measurements of the actual temperature and pressure of the flowing
gas. There is no graphical HMI for this instruction. More details on this
instruction can be found in PROCES-RM003.

Tank Strapping Table The P_StrapTbl (Tank Strapping Table) Add-On Instruction calculates the
volume of product in an upright cylindrical tank when given the level of the
(P_StrapTbl) product and the tank calibration table. This instruction can optionally
compensate for free water at the bottom of the tank (given a product/water
interface level). This instruction can also compensate for thermal expansion of
the tank shell (given the coefficient of linear expansion of the shell material
and product and ambient temperatures). There is no graphical HMI for this
instruction. More details on this instruction can be found in PROCES-
RM003.

138 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Chapter 4

Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

Library objects in this section comprise two groups of Advanced Process

Control: regulatory and procedural.
• Regulatory control focuses on the process variables (levels, flows,
temperatures, pressures, and so on). The control is designed to improve
loops that perform poorly and automate loops that are typically run in
manual by the operator. These loops include techniques such as ratio,
feed-forward, cascade, and decoupling control. Regulatory control
variables include:
– Proportional + Integral + Derivative Enhanced (P_PIDE)
– Analog Fanout (P_Fanout)
– High or Low Selector (P_HiLoSel)
– Deadband Controller (P_DBC)
• Procedural control focuses on the product being manufactured (cement,
polyethylene, ethanol. paper, and so on). The objects control the various
product specifications and parameters via a series of discrete sequential
actions. Procedural control variables include:
– Sequencer Object (P_Seq)
– Flowmeter Dosing / Weigh Scale Dosing (P_Dose)
– Lead/Lag/Standby Motor Group (P_LLS)

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 139

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

Proportional + Integral + The P_PIDE (Proportional + Integral + Derivative Enhanced) Add-On

Instruction provides the functionality of the Studio 5000 Logix Designer®
Derivative Enhanced PIDE function block. This Add-On Instruction provides a user experience
(P_PIDE) consistent with the rest of the Rockwell Automation Library of Process
Objects.

Display Elements

A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced

multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix® system, aid consistency, and save engineering time.
Table 99 - P_PIDE Display Elements Description
Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_P_PID Display element with PV and
CV numeric displays.

GO_P_PID1 Display element with PV, SP,

and CV numeric displays.

GO_P_PID2 Display element with SP and

CV numeric displays.

GO_P_PID_Trend Display Element with PV and

CV numeric displays and a
trend display that plots SP,
PV, High, and Low
Deviations. The trend is
scaled to PV EU Min and Max.

GO_P_PID_Trend1 Display Element with PV, SP,

and CV numeric displays and
a trend display that plots SP,
PV, High, and Low
Deviations. The trend is
scaled to PV EU Min and Max.

140 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

Table 99 - P_PIDE Display Elements Description

Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_P_PID_TrendWTarget Display Element with PV and
CV numeric displays and a
trend display that plots SP,
PV, High, and Low
Deviations. The trend is
scaled by using the High and
Low Deviations.

GO_P_PID_TrendWTarget1 Display Element with PV, SP,

and CV numeric displays and
a trend display that plots SP,
PV, High, and Low
Deviations. The trend is
scaled by using the High and
Low Deviations.

GO_P_PID_Indicator Bar graph with SP on the left

and PV on the right that is
scaled by PV EU minimum
and maximum.

GO_P_PID_Valve Proportional Valve display

element with PV and CV
numeric displays.

GO_P_PID_Valve1

GO_P_PID_Valve2

GO_P_PID_Valve3

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 141

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

Table 99 - P_PIDE Display Elements Description

Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_P_PID_Valve4 Proportional Valve display
element with PV, CV, and
Setpoint numeric displays.

GO_P_PID_Valve5

GO_P_PID_Valve6

GO_P_PID_Valve7

GO_P_PID_Valve8 Proportional Valve display

element with SP, CV, and
Setpoint numeric displays.

GO_P_PID_Valve9

GO_P_PID_Valve10

GO_P_PID_Valve11

142 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

Operator (Home) Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator command source. Several features are common to all Add-On
Instructions faceplates. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.

1
7
8

9
2
3
10

4
11
5

Table 100 - Operator Tab Description

Item Description
1 Current Process Variable (PV).
2 Bar graph for the current Process Variable.
3 Click to open the ramp wizard display. See Ramp Wizard Display on page 144.
4 Cascade loop mode.
5 Auto loop mode.
6 Current Setpoint (SP).
7 Current Control Variable (CV).
8 Type a value for the loop setpoint.
IMPORTANT: This value can be entered only when the instruction command source is Operator and the
Loop mode is Automatic or Manual.
9 Bar graph for the current Control Variable.
10 Loop mode indicator.
11 Cascade loop mode.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 143

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

Figure 14 - Ramp Wizard Display

1 4

2 5
3

Table 101 - Ramp Wizard Display Description

Item Description
1 Type new target setpoint.
2 Ramp Time.
3 Stop setpoint ramping.
4 Calculated rate of change.
5 Start setpoint ramping.

144 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot, temporarily work around device
problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance. Several features are
common to all Add-On Instructions faceplates. See Basic Faceplate Attributes
on page 25

Table 102 - Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Threshold Name: Click a threshold name to open the associated P_Gate faceplate.
2 Type the threshold (trip point) for analog input alarms.
3 Type the deadband (hysteresis) that applies to each alarm limit. Deadband helps prevent a noisy signal
from generating numerous spurious alarms.
Example: If the High alarm limit is 90.0 and the High alarm deadband is 5, once the signal rises above
90.0 and generates a High alarm. The signal must fall below 85.0 (90.0 minus 5.0) for the alarm to clear.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 145

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

Advanced Properties

Click the advanced properties graphic. The tuning, advanced maintenance,

engineering, HMI configuration, and faults settings are available.

Tuning

2 5
3
6

Table 103 - Tuning Tab Description

Item Description
1 Trend display for Process Variable, Setpoint, and Controlled Variable.
2 Setpoint data entry.
3 Process variable data entry.
4 Tuning constant entries.
5 Cascade loop mode.
6 Auto loop mode.
7 Manual loop mode.

146 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

Advanced Maintenance Tab Page 1

Table 104 - Advanced Maintenance Tab 1 Description

Item Description
1 Type the Operator ratio.
2 Type the maximum and minimum limits for the ratio.
3 Type the Operator Setpoint for the Operator Loop mode.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 147

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

Advanced Maintenance Tab Page 2

3 6

Table 105 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Type the maximum and minimum limits for the setpoint.
2 Type the interlock setpoint.
3 Type the operator setpoint rate of decrease limit.
4 Type the maximum setpoint rate of decrease.
5 Type the maximum setpoint rate of increase.
6 Type the operator setpoint rate of increase limit.

148 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

Advanced Maintenance Tab Page 3

3
4
5

Table 106 - Advanced Maintenance Tab 3 Description

Item Description
1 Type the value for the zero-crossing deadband (in PV engineering units). When the loop error is less
than the zero-crossing deadband, the loop output does not change.
IMPORTANT: See the PIDE built-in instruction online help for more information.
2 Type the maximum and minimum values of the PV range (span) (in PV engineering units). The
maximum value must be greater than the minimum.
3 Gains: Proportional

This value depends on the setting of Cfg_Depend.

If Cfg_Depend = 1 (dependent gains, the default), type the Controller Gain (unitless). This gain is
applied to the Proportional, Integral, and Derivative terms.
If Cfg_Depend = 0 (independent gains), type the Proportional Gain (unitless). This gain is applied to
the Proportional term only.
A value of zero in either case disables the Proportional term of the controller. Negative values are not
valid.
4 Gains: Integral

This value depends on the setting of Cfg_Depend.

If Cfg_Depend = 1 (dependent gains, the default), type the Integral Time Constant (minutes
pre-repeat).
If Cfg_Depend = 0 (independent gains), type the Integral Gain
(1/minutes).
A value of zero in either case disables the Integral term of the controller. Negative values are not valid.
5 Gains: Derivative

This value depends on the setting of Cfg_Depend.

If Cfg_Depend = 1 (dependent gains, the default), type the Derivative Time Constant (minutes).
If Cfg_Depend = 0 (independent gains), type the Derivative Gain (minutes).
A value of zero in either case disables the Derivative term of the controller. Negative values are not valid.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 149

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

Advanced Maintenance Tab Page 4

Table 107 - Advanced Maintenance Tab 4 Description

Item Description
1 Type the maximum allowed value of the CV in percent. The CV output is clamped not to exceed the
entered value. This value must be less than or equal to 100.0 and greater than the CV Low Limit.
Type the minimum allowed value of the CV in percent. The CV output is clamped not to go below the
entered value. This value must be greater than or equal to 0.0 and less than the CV High Limit.
2 Type the maximum allowed CV rate of change in percent per second. A value of zero disables rate
limiting. Negative values are not valid.

150 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

Advanced Maintenance Tab Page 5

3
2
4

Table 108 - Advanced Maintenance Tab 5 Description

Item Description
1 Type the value in percent to output as the CV when an Interlock input is not OK. The CV is held at this
value until the interlock inputs are OK (subject to interlock bypassing).
2 Type the minimum/maximum value for the controlled variable limits.
3 Type the value of the output (in CV engineering units) that correspond to a CV of 100.0%. This value
cannot equal the CV EU minimum.
4 Type the value of the output (in CV engineering units) that correspond to a CV of 0.0%.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 151

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

Table 109 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Page 6 Description

Item Description
1 Type the CV value. When Val_CVOut is greater than this value, Sts_Active is set to 1, and the HMI shows
the graphic symbol in the active state (for example, control valve shown as Open). When Val_CVOut is
less than or equal to this value, Sts_Active is set to 0, and the HMI shows the graphic symbol in the
inactive state (for example, control valve shown as Closed).

152 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

Engineering Tab Page 1

2
3

5
6

7
8

Table 110 - Engineering Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Type the interval (in seconds) to execute the PID algorithm.
2 Check so that when this parameter is:
• On, the operator settings track the program settings when command source is Program, and
program settings track the operator settings when the command source is Operator. Transition
between command sources is bumpless.
• Off, the operator settings and program settings retain their values regardless of command source.
When the command source is changed, the value of a limit can change, such as from the Program-
set value to the Operator-set value.
3 Check so that Program and operator settings track when the command source is Hand or Override.
4 Check to bypass Interlocks that can be bypassed while in Override command source.
5 Click to have the Proportional action of the PID algorithm apply only to changes in the PV and ignore
changes in setpoint.
6 Click to have the Proportional action of the PID algorithm apply to changes to the PV and to the
setpoint.
7 Click to have the Derivative action of the PID algorithm apply only to the rate of change of the PV and
ignore changes in setpoint.
8 Click to have the Derivative action of the PID algorithm apply to the rate of change of the PV and to the
setpoint.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 153

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

Engineering Tab 2

2
3

5
6
7

Table 111 - Engineering Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Check to enable Auto Loop mode.
2 Check to enable Manual Loop mode.
3 Check to enable Cascade Loop mode.
4 Check to multiply the Cascade SP input by the ratio value to get the loop setpoint.
Clear the checkbox to use the Cascade SP input as the loop setpoint directly.
5 Click to disable normal loop made selection
6 Click to choose manual as the normal loop mode
7 Click to choose auto as the normal loop mode
8 Click to choose cascade as the normal loop mode
9 Check to allow the operator to select only the defined normal loop mode.

154 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

Engineering Tab Page 3

2
3
4
5
6

7
8

Table 112 - Engineering Tab Page 3 Description

Item Description
1 Check to set the Loop mode to Manual when the Use CVInit Value input is true. The loop is left in manual
with the CV at the initialization value when the initialization request clears.
Clear this checkbox to leave the loop in its current mode on an initialization request. When the
initialization request clears, the loop resumes controlling in its previous mode.
2 Click to keep the Loop mode what it was at powerdown.
3 Click to set the Loop mode to Manual on powerup.
4 Click to set the Loop mode to Auto on powerup.
5 Click to set the Loop mode to Cascade on powerup.
6 Click to keep the Loop mode what it was at powerdown.
7 Type a value to apply to the loop CV (in percent) on controller powerup. The CV is set to this value on
controller powerup in Run mode and on controller transition from Program mode to Run mode.
8 Type a value to apply to the loop setpoint (in PV engineering units) on controller powerup. The setpoint
is set to this value on controller powerup in Run mode and on controller transition from Program mode
to Run mode.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 155

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

Engineering Tab Page 4

1
2
3

4
5

Table 113 - Engineering Tab Page 4 Description

Item Description
1 Check to have the current PV copied to the SP (track) whenever the loop is in Manual mode.
2 Check to skip the setpoint rate of change limiting in Interlock Trip, Maintenance, or Override.
3 Check to allow navigation to the setpoint Ramp Wizard Display from the Operator tab. See Operator
(Home) Tab on page 143.
4 Click for reverse-acting loop response (default). When the PV increases, the CV (output) decreases.
5 Click for direct-acting loop response. When the PV increases, the CV (output) increases.
6 Click to use the Independent Gains form of the PID algorithm. Changes to the proportional gain do not
affect integral or derivative response.
7 Click to use the Dependent Gains form of the PID algorithm (default). Changes to Cfg_PGain are applied
as loop gain changes and affect proportional, integral, and derivative responses.
8 Type a value for maximum deviation between SP and PV. If the deviation exceeds this value, the SP
ramp pauses until the PV returns to a value within the set deviation.

156 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

Engineering Tab Page 5

1
2
3

4
5
6

Table 114 - Engineering Tab Page 5 Description

Item Description
1 Check to enable derivative smoothing. Derivative smoothing can help reduce output jitter due to noise
on the PV signal.
Clear this checkbox to disable derivative smoothing. When derivative smoothing is disabled, it can result
in quicker loop response at high derivative gain.
2 Check to use the zero-crossing deadband. The error must change signs (cross zero) for the deadband
function to be activated and stop changes to loop output.
Clear this checkbox to disable the zero-crossing function. Once the error is within the deadband, the
output does not change, even if the sign of the error has not changed (error has not crossed zero).
3 Check to limit the CV to the range specified by Cfg_MinCV and Cfg_MaxCV when the Loop mode is
Manual.
Clear this checkbox to allow CV values anywhere in the 0.0%…100.0% range in Manual Loop mode.
4 Check to keep control of loop mode commands with the Operator, Program, External, or Follow the
Source even if the instruction is in Program mode.
5 Check to keep control of the controlled variable quantity setting with the Operator, Program, External,
or Follow the Source even if the instruction is in Program mode.
6 Check to keep control of the setpoint settings with the Operator, Program, External, or Follow the Source
even if the instruction is in Program mode.
7 Check to keep control of the ratio settings with the Operator, Program, External, or Follow the Source
even if the instruction is in Program mode.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 157

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

Engineering Tab Page 6

2
3
4

5
6
7
8

9
10
11

Table 115 - Engineering Tab Page 6 Description

Item Description
1 Possible Failures
2 For the given failure, do not change the CV operation, keep controlling.
3 For the given failure, hold the CV at the current value.
4 For the given failure, set the CV to the configured value.
5 For the given failure, do not change the SP operation.
6 For the given failure, hold the SP at the current value.
7 For the given failure, set the SP to the configured value.
8 For the given failure, have SP track the current PV value.
9 For the given failure, keep current loop mode.
10 For the given failure, set the loop mode to manual.
11 For the given failure, If loop made is cascade set to auto.

TIP To have the loop mode return to the previous control operation when the
failure clears, set Loop Mode Action to None.

158 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

HMI Configuration Tab 1

The HMI configuration tab provides access to displayed text, and faceplate-to-
faceplate navigation settings. Configure the description, label, tag, and security
area for the device. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for the
description of the common attributes.

1
2

3
4

Table 116 - HMI Configuration Tab 1 Description

Item Description
1 Type the PV engineering units for display on the HMI.
2 Type the CV engineering units for display on the HMI. Percent (%) is the default.
3 Type in the number of decimal places that are displayed for the Process Variable
4 Type in the number of decimal places that are displayed for the Control Variable

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 159

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

HMI Configuration Tab 2

1 5
2 6
3
4

Table 117 - HMI Configuration Tab 2 Description

Item Description
1 Check to enable navigation to the CV object.
2 Check to enable navigation to the PV object.
3 Check to enable navigation to Cascade SP object.
4 Check to enable navigation to the Interlock object.
5 Type the name of the CV Object to navigate to.
6 Type the name of the PV Object to navigate to.

160 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

Faults Tabs

Page 1 of the Diagnostics tab displays PID Instruction faults.

Page 2 of the Diagnostics tab displays PID Instruction Configuration Faults.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 161

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications that are helpful to diagnose or help
prevent device problems. The device problems can include specific reasons a
device is 'Not Ready', device warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and
predictive/preventive maintenance data.

The Diagnostics tab displays possible reasons for the device not being ready.
See Diagnostics Tab on page 28

Alarms Tab

The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the
alarms page changes color to show the current active alarm status. A blinking
alarm icon indicates that one or more alarms must be acknowledged or the
device must be reset. See Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm) on page 51 for
more information.

162 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

Trends

On the upper part of the Trends tab, you can view the SP (blue line) and PV
(green line).

On the lower part of the Trends tab, you can view the Output CV (black line)
and the Target CV (orange line).

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 163

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

Analog Fanout (P_Fanout) The Analog Fanout (P_Fanout) Add-On Instruction fans one 'primary' analog
output signal out to multiple 'secondary' users or devices. Each secondary
output has configurable gain, offset, and clamping limits.

Display Elements

A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced

multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix system, aid consistency and save engineering time.

Table 118 - P_Fanout Display Element Description

Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_P_Fanout P_Fanout global object
(horizontal layout).

GO_P_Fanout1 P_Fanout global object

(vertical layout).

164 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator mode. Several features are common to all Add-On Instructions
faceplates. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.

If outputs 6, 7, and 8 are used by the instruction (in other words, if

Cfg_HasCV6… Cfg_HasCV8 are 1), the global object has a second page of the
faceplate that displays the information.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 165

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot, temporarily work around device
problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance. Several features are
common to all Add-On Instructions faceplates. See Basic Faceplate Attributes
on page 25

1 3

Table 119 - Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type a value that sets the ratio to calculate each individual output.
This value either sets the operator ratio (for example, OSet_CV1Ratio) or the configuration ratio (for
example, Cfg_CV1Ratio) depending on the ratio source selection.
2 Type a value that sets the offset to calculate each individual output.
This value either sets the operator offset (for example, OSet_CV1Offset) or the configuration offset (for
example, Cfg_CV1Offset) depending on the ratio source selection.
3 Operator setting for the Input CV rate of change limit (increasing or decreasing).
If Cfg_MaxCVRoC = 0.0, then this parameter can be set to zero, which means the rate of change is not
limited.

166 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

Advanced Properties Display

The Advanced Properties Display opens to the engineering settings. The

Advanced Properties Display provides access to device configuration
parameters and ranges, and options for device and I/O setup. This tab is used
for initial system commissioning or later system changes.

Engineering Tab

1 3

2 4

Table 120 - Engineering Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Check to enable use of the corresponding output.
2 Type a value for the minimum value to be used to clamp CV (in engineering units).
3 Type a rate the CV is to change to a calculated value after initialization to provide bumpless transfer from
initialization.
4 Type a value for the maximum value to be used to clamp CV (in engineering units).

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 167

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

1
2

3
4

Table 121 - Engineering Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Click to use the CV1 initialization value (Inp_CV1InitVal) to set the initialization output (Out_CV_InitVal)
when initialization is requested.
2 Click to use a fixed value (Cfg_FixedInitVal) to set the initialization output (Out_CV_InitVal) when
initialization is requested.
Type a value to set the initialization value (Out_CVInitVal) if initialization is requested and a fixed value
option is selected.
3 Click to hold last good value.
4 Click to pass through the bad value.
5 Type values to set the limits to use to clamp the CV.
6 Type values to set the limits to display for the CV.

168 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

HMI Configuration Tab

The HMI configuration tab provides access to displayed text, and faceplate-to-
faceplate navigation settings. Configure the description, label, tag, and security
area for the device. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for the
description of the common attributes.

2
1 3

Table 122 - HMI Configuration Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Type the description of the output name.
2 Type the units that are used with the CV.
3 Sets the CV engineering units to use for display.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 169

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

1 3

Table 123 - HMI Configuration Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Check to permit navigation to a faceplate for which you typed a tag name. For example, ‘MyCVObject.’.
2 Type the number of decimal places to be shown for CV.
3 Type the text that is displayed on the HMI.

Diagnostics Tab
The Diagnostic tab provides indications that are helpful to diagnose or help
prevent device problems. The device problems can include specific reasons a
device is 'Not Ready', device warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and
predictive/preventive maintenance data.

The Diagnostics tab displays possible reasons for the device not being ready.
See Diagnostics Tab on page 28

Alarms Tab

The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the
alarms page changes color to show the current active alarm status. A blinking
alarm icon indicates that one or more alarms must be acknowledged or the
device must be reset. See Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm) on page 51 for
more information.

170 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

High or Low Selector The P_HiLoSel (High or Low Selector Add-On Instruction) selects the lowest
of the (up to six) incoming CVs (if Cfg_HiLoSel = 0), or the highest of the
(P_HiLoSel) incoming CVs (if Cfg_HiLoSel =1) and outputs it (Out_CV).

The unselected CVs are flagged to track the selected CV.

Display Elements

A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced

multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix system, aid consistency and save engineering time.
Table 124 - P_HiLoSel Display Elements Description
Display Element Name Display Element Description
P_HiLoSel Standard High or Low Selector global
object.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 171

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator mode. Several features are common to all Add-On Instructions
faceplates. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.

The Operator tab shows the following information:

• Current operation (High or Low Select)
• Currently selected input (white highlight)
• Bar graph for clamp limits from minimum to maximum plus Output
CV indicator
• Input CV values and Output CV value

172 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot, temporarily work around device
problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance. Several features are
common to all Add-On Instructions faceplates. See Basic Faceplate Attributes
on page 25

Table 125 - Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Check to use a CV input.
Clear a checkbox not to use the input and put the instruction in Maintenance Bypass.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 173

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

Advanced Properties Display

The Advanced Properties Display opens to the engineering settings. The

Advanced Properties Display provides access to device configuration
parameters and ranges, and options for device and I/O setup. This tab is used
for initial system commissioning or later system changes.

Engineering Tab

4
1

Table 126 - Engineering Tab Description

Item Description
1 Check 'Has Input' (CV1…CV6) where an input is connected.
2 Type in the minimum and maximum to set the range for the selected input CV.
If the selected input CV is below the minimum, it is clamped to the minimum value.
If the selected input CV is above the maximum, it is clamped to the maximum value.
3 Click High Select to select the highest input CV value to pass to the output.
Click Low Select to select the lowest input CV value to pass to the output.
4 Check a 'Use Offset' (CV1…CV6) to include the Kp*E offset in initialization calculation.

174 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

HMI Configuration Tab

The HMI configuration tab provides access to displayed text, and faceplate-to-
faceplate navigation settings. Configure the description, label, tag, and security
area for the device. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for the
description of the common attributes.

Table 127 - HMI Configuration Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Type the engineering units for display on the HMI. Percent (%) is the default.
2 Type in the number of decimal places that are displayed for the CV.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 175

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

1 2

Table 128 - HMI Configuration Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Check an input (CV1…CV6) or the Output CV to allow navigation to a specified object.
2 Type the tag name for the corresponding input (CV1…CV6) or Output CV.

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications that are helpful to diagnose or help
prevent device problems. The device problems can include specific reasons a
device is 'Not Ready', device warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and
predictive/preventive maintenance data.

The Diagnostics tab displays possible reasons for the device not being ready.
See Diagnostics Tab on page 28

Alarms Tab

The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the
alarms page changes color to show the current active alarm status. A blinking
alarm icon indicates that one or more alarms must be acknowledged or the
device must be reset. See Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm) on page 51 for
more information.

176 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

Deadband Controller The P_DBC (Deadband Controller) Add-On Instruction provides control of
a process variable within limits by using one or two discrete outputs. A
(P_DBC) deadband controller is also known as a 'bang-bang' or 'on-off ' controller.

Display Elements

A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced

multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix system, aids consistency and saves engineering time.
Table 129 - P_DBC Global Object Loop Symbol
Global Object Name Global Object Description
GO_P_DBC Standard deadband controller global
object.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 177

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator mode.Several features are common to all Add-On Instructions
faceplates. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.

1 9
10

2
11
12
3
13
4
14
5
6 15
7
16
8
17

Table 130 - Operator Tab Description

Item Description
1 Drive PV Lower Limit
2 PV EU maximum
3 Drive PV Lower Value
4 Current PV Value
5 Drive PV Higher Value
6 PV EU minimum
7 Current PV Value
8 Drive PV Higher Limit
9 High Rate of Change Decreasing Limit
10 High Rate of Change Increasing Limit
11 Rate of Change Indicator
12 Current Rate of Change
13 Controlled Variable Indicator
14 Auto/Manual Mode Indicator
15 Drive PV buttons. From left to right: drive PV lower, don’t drive PV, drive PV higher
16 Manual Mode Command Button
17 Auto Mode Command Button

178 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot, temporarily work around device
problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance. Several features are
common to all Add-On Instructions faceplates. See Basic Faceplate Attributes
on page 25

1 7
2 8
9
3
10
4

11
5
12
6

Table 131 - Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Enter the value of the PV at which the output turns off and PV starts to decrease.
2 Enter the value of the PV at which the output turns on and PV starts to increase.
3 Type the number that is used to establish the high deviation limit. When the PV reaches this limit, a
High Deviation alarm is generated.
EXAMPLE: In the examples, the Lower setpoint is 67 and the PV Hi Dev Status is 5. We add 67 and 5 to
get the high deviation limit of 72.
4 Type the number that is used to establish the low deviation limit. When the PV reaches this limit, a Low
Deviation alarm is generated.
EXAMPLE: In the examples, the Raise setpoint is 30 and the PV Lo Dev Status is -5. We add 30 and -5 to
get the low deviation limit of 25.
5 Type the number to set the high Rate of Change (decrease) limit (83 in the example). When the Rate of
Change reaches this level, a Hi Rate of Decrease alarm is generated.
6 Type the number to set the high Rate of Change (increase) limit (17 in the example). When the Rate of
Change reaches this level, a Hi Rate of Increase alarm is generated.

7 Type a number that is the size of the deadband for the Lower output (below Lower limit)
8 Type a number that is the size of the deadband for the Raise output (above Raise limit)
9 Type the number that PV must decrease to reset a High Deviation alarm.
EXAMPLE: The high deviation limit is 72 and the deadband is 1. The PV must decrease 1 unit to 71 to
reset the High Deviation alarm.
IMPORTANT: The deadband can be set so that the PV must decrease below the Lower setpoint before
the High Deviation alarm is reset. For example, the deadband can be set to 10 so that the PV must
decrease to 62 to reset the alarm.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 179

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

Item Description
10 Type the number that PV must increase to reset a Low Deviation alarm.
EXAMPLE: The low deviation limit is 30 and the deadband is 1. The PV must increase 1 unit to 26 to
reset the Low Deviation alarm.
IMPORTANT: The deadband can be set so that the PV must increase above the Raise setpoint before
the Low Deviation alarm is reset. For example, the deadband can be set to 10 so that the PV must
decrease to 35 to reset the alarm.
11 Type the number that the Rate of Change must decrease to reset a Hi Rate of Decrease alarm.
12 Type the number that the Rate of Change must increase to reset a Hi Rate of Increase alarm.

Advanced Properties Display

The Advanced Properties Display opens to the engineering settings. The

Advanced Properties Display provides access to device configuration
parameters and ranges, and options for device and I/O setup. This tab is used
for initial system commissioning or later system changes.

Engineering Tab

3
4

180 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

Table 132 - Engineering Tab Description

Item Description
1 Check, the operator settings track the program settings when mode is Program, and program settings
track the operator settings when the mode is Operator. Transition between modes is bumpless.

Clear the checkbox, this instruction does not modify the operator settings and program settings. The
operator settings and program settings retain their values regardless of mode. When the mode is
changed, the value of a limit can change, such as from the Program-set value to the Operator-set value.
2 Click the PV rate of change time base used.
3 Type the lower limit for the Loop PV Higher point.
4 Type the upper limit for the loop PV Lower point.
5 Minimum and maximum values for PV input.
These values are reflected on the PV bar graph on the Operator tab and the graph on the Trends tab.
6 Type the number of units per x seconds, where x equals the number of seconds selected for the PV rate
of change time base.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 181

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

HMI Configuration Tab

The HMI configuration tab provides access to displayed text, and faceplate-to-
faceplate navigation settings. Configure the description, label, tag, and security
area for the device. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for the
description of the common attributes.

1 5
2 6

Table 133 - HMI Configuration Tab Description

Item Description
1 Check to enable navigation to the PV object.
2 Check to enable navigation to the Output object.
3 Type the text of the engineering units for the PV.
4 Type the number of decimal places that are used for the PV.
5 Type the name of the PV object to navigate to.
6 Type the name of the Output object to navigate to.

182 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications that are helpful to diagnose or help
prevent device problems. The device problems can include specific reasons a
device is 'Not Ready', device warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and
predictive/preventive maintenance data.

The Diagnostics tab displays possible reasons for the device not being ready.
See Diagnostics Tab on page 28

Alarms Tab

The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the
alarms page changes color to show the current active alarm status. A blinking
alarm icon indicates that one or more alarms must be acknowledged or the
device must be reset. See Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm) on page 51 for
more information.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 183

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

Rockwell Automation The Rockwell Automation® Sequencer Object (P_Seq) provides a flexible
controller-based step sequencing solution that reduces engineering time by
Sequencer Object (P_Seq) automating common operator procedures. The step-by-step configuration
makes it easy to adjust procedures directly from the HMI displays without
having to create or modify custom code in the controller. The Sequencer can be
employed in simple and complex sequences without costly tests and
re-engineering. You add, delete, or modify steps that are required accomplish
the objective of the sequence.

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator mode.Several features are common to all Add-On Instructions
faceplates. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.

1
2 6
3 7
8
4
9

10

11

Table 134 - Operator Tab Description

Item Description
1 Displays the current sequence state.
2 Displays the current step.
3 Displays the time in current step.
4 Displays the time in current sequence.
5 Click to hold the sequence.
6 Displays the step number, name, time, and the conditions that the sequence is waiting to qualify.
7 Click to start a sequence.
8 Click to stop a sequence.
9 Click to reset a sequence.
10 Click to display the runtime sequence window.
11 Click to restart a sequence.

184 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot, temporarily work around device
problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance. Several features are
common to all Add-On Instructions faceplates. See Basic Faceplate Attributes
on page 25

1
2

Table 135 - Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Displays an indicator if there is an active wait in the current step.
2 Displays the inputs per the current step of the sequence. Inputs 0…31.
3 Click to force step complete.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 185

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

Advanced Properties Display

The Advanced Properties Display opens to the Advanced Maintenance

settings. The Advanced Properties Display provides access to device
configuration parameters and ranges, and options for device and I/O setup.
This tab is used for initial system commissioning or later system changes.

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Table 136 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 All inputs are available for use and are checked. Each input is qualified as part of the step.
Clear an input if there is a maintenance issue with the input. All steps then ignore the input and it is not
used for qualification. The Sequencer goes into Maintenance Bypass.

186 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

Table 137 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Click to toggle the given output.
An output cannot be toggled if:
• It’s actively driven by the sequence
• Track Input is enabled for that input (black numbers)
A dark gray slider is an indication of the 'Off' state (0).
A white slider is an indication of the 'On' state (1).
IMPORTANT: Maintenance personnel can manipulate the output directly from this tab if 'Track Input'
on the Discrete Output Configuration page is turned off for a particular output AND (the current
Sequencer step is not using a particular output OR the sequence is in a Held state).

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 187

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

Table 138 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Page 3 Description

Item Description
1 Type a setpoint or value for the analog outputs that are configured for the Sequencer.
Outputs that are being actively driven by the sequence cannot be written. These outputs are
unavailable.
IMPORTANT: An output can be written only if 'Track Input' on the Analog Output Configuration page
for that particular output is turn off.

188 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

Engineering Tab

1
6
2
7
3
8

4 10

5 11

Table 139 - Engineering Tab Description

Item Description
1 Check to enable the manual prompt queue.
2 Check to put the sequence in a Held State if the step timer expires.
3 Check the box to indicate the Sequencer action when an interlock trips.
4 Click the Display Sequence Configuration Window button to access the Discrete Inputs, Discrete
Outputs, and Analog Outputs configuration dialog boxes.
5 Type the step to configure.
6 Type a maximum value for a quantity.
7 Type a default quantity for a sequence.
8 Type a minimum value for a quantity.
9 Type a time in milliseconds that the sequence must be complete or a timeout occurs.
10 Click to configure one step.
11 Click to configure multiple steps.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 189

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

There are faceplates that open from the engineering tab that enable input and
output configuration and configuration of both individual and multiple steps.
The following figures show examples of those configuration faceplates.

Figure 15 - I/O Configuration Inputs

Figure 16 - I/O Configuration Digital Outputs

190 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

Figure 17 - I/O Configuration Analog Outputs

Figure 18 - Single Step Configuration Page 1

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 191

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

Figure 19 - Single Step Configuration Page 2

Figure 20 - Single Step Configuration Inputs

192 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

Figure 21 - Single Step Configurations Digital Outputs

Figure 22 - Single Step Configurations Analog Outputs

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 193

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

Figure 23 - Multiple Step Configuration

Figure 24 - Multiple Step Configuration Inputs

194 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

HMI Configuration Tab

The HMI configuration tab provides access to displayed text, and faceplate-to-
faceplate navigation settings. Configure the description, label, tag, and security
area for the device. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for the
description of the common attributes.

1
2

Table 140 - HMI Configuration Tab Description

Item Description
1 Check if a Permissive object is used with this motor. This check changes the Permissive indicator to a
clickable button to open the Permissive faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Permissive object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_Perm’. For example, if your P_Seq object has the name ’Seq123’, then its Permissive object
must be named ‘Seq123_Perm’.
2 Check if an Interlock object is used with this motor. This check changes the Interlock indicator to a
clickable button to open the Interlock faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Interlock object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_Intlk’. For example, if your P_Seq object has the name ’Seq123’, then its Interlock object
must be named ‘Seq123_Intlk’.
3 Type the engineering units for the quantity.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 195

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications that are helpful to diagnose or help
prevent device problems. The device problems can include specific reasons a
device is 'Not Ready', device warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and
predictive/preventive maintenance data.

The Diagnostics tab displays possible reasons for the device not being ready.
See Diagnostics Tab on page 28

Alarms Tab

The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the
alarms page changes color to show the current active alarm status. A blinking
alarm icon indicates that one or more alarms must be acknowledged or the
device must be reset. See Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm) on page 51 for
more information.

196 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

Dosing (P_Dose) The P_Dose Add-On Instruction controls ingredient addition to measure the
quantity of ingredient that is being added. The instruction can be used for a
flowmeter or weigh scale.

Display Elements

A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced

multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix system, aid consistency and save engineering time.
Table 141 - P_Dose Display Elements Description
Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_P_DoseFM Vertical Orientation Top

GO_P_DoseFM1 Vertical Orientation Bottom

GO_P_DoseFM2 Horizontal Orientation Right

GO_P_DoseFM3 Horizontal Orientation Left

GO_P_DoseWS Vertical orientation up.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 197

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

Table 141 - P_Dose Display Elements Description

Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_P_DoseWS1 Horizontal orientation right.

GO_P_DoseWS2 Horizontal orientation left.

198 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator command source. Several features are common to all Add-On
Instructions faceplates. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.

1
2

7
3
4 8

5 9

10

6 11

Table 142 - Operator Tab Description

Item Description
1 Dosing Equipment Commanded State.
2 Delivery Progress Bar.
3 Configure the quantity to deliver.
4 Click to stop the Totalizer.
5 Click to clear the totalized quantity.
6 Click to stop the Totalizer flow.
7 Delivery progress.
8 Click to start the Totalizer.
9 Click to check tolerances.
10 Click to bump the Totalizer flow.
11 Click to start the Totalizer flow.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 199

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot, temporarily work around device
problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance. Several features are
common to all Add-On Instructions faceplates. See Basic Faceplate Attributes
on page 25

1
2

3
4

Table 143 - Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Configure the quantity before the end of delivery, when a switch to a reduced flow rate (dribble) for
finer control of the final quantity is made.
2 Configure the quantity before reaching the Setpoint Quantity when a command the delivery
equipment to stop to allow equipment to react. The preact quantity helps prevent overshooting the
delivery Setpoint.
3 Type the quantity by which delivery can exceed the setpoint. If the delivered quantity is more than the
setpoint plus this value, a tolerance check shows over tolerance.
4 Type the quantity by which delivery can fall short of the setpoint. If the delivered quantity is less than
the setpoint minus this value, a tolerance check shows under tolerance.

200 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

Advanced Properties Display

The Advanced Properties Display opens to the Advanced Maintenance

settings. The Advanced Properties Display provides access to device
configuration parameters and ranges, and options for device and I/O setup.
This tab is used for initial system commissioning or later system changes.

Advanced Maintenance Tab

2
3

4
5

Table 144 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type a value so that when the flow rate is less than this value, it is treated as zero. This value helps
prevent totalizing the transmitter error when flow is stopped.
2 Type the percentage of delivery error.
When the delivery tolerance is checked, if no bump has occurred and if the delivery is in tolerance, the
error (difference between delivery setpoint and actual delivery) is multiplied by this percentage and
applied to the preact. The preact self tunes and learns the correct value of the preact over time.
3 Configure the Time (in seconds) to Pulse the Clear Output to clear an external totalizer, such as one in an
intelligent flowmeter.
4 Type the amount of time to command the controlled equipment to run flow when the bump command
button is pressed. If this value is set to zero, Bump is treated like a Jog: flow starts when the button is
pressed and stops when the button is released. If this value is greater than zero, flow is bumped for the
configured time.
5 Type the amount of time in seconds after flow is stopped for the scale reading to settle before a
tolerance check can be commanded.
6 Type the maximum allowed feedback time.
If equipment feedback is being used, the instruction allows this much time after commanding the
equipment for feedback to show the equipment in the commanded state before raising a fault status.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 201

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

Engineering Tab

1
2
3

4
5

6
7

8
9

Table 145 - Engineering Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Check to adjust the Preact automatically based on the actual versus setpoint Quantity after each
successful delivery.
Clear this checkbox to leave the Preact as entered.
2 Check if the flowmeter provides a Rate input but no Quantity input. The Rate is totalized (integrated) to
calculate Quantity.
3 Check if the flowmeter provides a Quantity input but no Rate input. The rate of change in the Quantity
is used as the Rate.
4 Check to command the equipment to a slower Dribble rate as delivery nears completion to improve the
accuracy of Quantity delivered.
5 Check if the controlled equipment provides feedback of its running, dribbling, and stopped status to
this instruction. This instruction checks that the equipment is performing the commanded function
and provides a status (and optional alarm) if the equipment fails to respond as commanded within a
configurable time.
IMPORTANT: The feedback fault time is configured on the Advanced Maintenance tab.
Clear this checkbox if the controlled equipment does not provide feedback of its status. The instruction
assumes that the equipment is performing the commanded function and no equipment failure-to-
respond checks occur.
6 Check if you want the dosing instruction to attempt to stop the controlled equipment if an equipment
fault is reported (Inp_CtrldEqupFault) or detected (via feedbacks).
Clear this checkbox if you want the dosing instruction to keep performing its current function, even if
an equipment fault occurs.
7 Check to enable bumpless Program/Operator transition of Quantity Setpoint, Dribble Quantity, Preact,
and Tolerance Threshold settings (tracking).
8 Check to designate as a Transfer In instance.
9 Check to designate as a Transfer Out instance.

202 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

2
3

4
5

Table 146 - Engineering Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Type the maximum allowed quantity to deliver. The quantity setpoint is clamped not to exceed this
value.
2 Type the number of counts in Inp_QtyPV that equal one engineering unit of quantity delivered. This
value is used with pulse output flowmeters and a pulse input I/O card.
3 Type the rate to quantity engineering units multiplier. This value is used if the input is in one unit of
measure, such as gallons per minute, and the total is in another that requires conversion above and
beyond time units, such as barrels.
4 Type the quantity rollover. This value is used when a quantity or pulse count input rolls over to zero at
some value, such as 999,999 counts.
5 Type the filter time constant for calculated rate.
6 Click to set the time base for rate.
7 Type the number of units per x seconds, where x equals the number of seconds selected for the time
base for rate.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 203

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

2
3

Table 147 - Engineering Tab Page 3 Description

Item Description
1 Check to keep control of dosing Start and Stop commands with the Operator, Program, External, or
Follow the Source even if the instruction is in Program command source.
2 Check to keep control of the Setpoint quantity setting with the Operator, Program, External, or Follow
the Source even if the instruction is in Program command source.
3 Check to keep control of the Dribble and Preact quantity settings with the Operator, Program, External,
or Follow the Source even if the instruction is in Program command source.
4 Check to keep control of the high and low Tolerance settings with the Operator, Program, External, or
Follow the Source even if the instruction is in Program command source.
5 Type the normal running delivery rate that is used when the P_Dose instruction is in simulation
(Inp_Sim = 1).
6 Type the dribble (slow) delivery rate that is used when the P_Dose instruction is in simulation
(Inp_Sim = 1).

204 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

HMI Configuration Tab

The HMI configuration tab provides access to displayed text, and faceplate-to-
faceplate navigation settings. Configure the description, label, tag, and security
area for the device. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for the
description of the common attributes.

3
4

5
6
1
2

Table 148 - HMI Configuration Tab Description

Item Description
1 Check to enable navigation to the Quantity Input object faceplate.
IMPORTANT: Navigation is accomplished by clicking the raw quantity input on page 1 of the
Maintenance tab.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Channel Quantity object in the controller must be the name of the
object with the suffix ‘_ChanQty’. For example, if your P_Dose object has the name ‘DoseFM123’, then
its Channel Quantity object must be named ‘DoseFM123_ChanQty’.
2 Check to enable navigation to the Rate Input object faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Channel Rate object in the controller must be the name of the object
with the suffix ‘_ChanRate’. For example, if your P_Dose object has the name ‘DoseFM123’, then its
Channel Rate object must be named ‘DoseFM123_ChanRate’.
3 Type the units of measure descriptor for the Quantity delivered.
4 Type the units of measure descriptor for the Rate of delivery.
5 Type in the number of decimal places that are displayed for the Quantity Process Variable
6 Type in the number of decimal places that are displayed for the Rate Process Variable

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 205

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications that are helpful to diagnose or help
prevent device problems. The device problems can include specific reasons a
device is 'Not Ready', device warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and
predictive/preventive maintenance data.

The Diagnostics tab displays possible reasons for the device not being ready.
See Diagnostics Tab on page 28

Alarms Tab

The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the
alarms page changes color to show the current active alarm status. A blinking
alarm icon indicates that one or more alarms must be acknowledged or the
device must be reset. See Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm) on page 51 for
more information.

206 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

Lead/Lag/Standby Motor The P_LLS (Lead/Lag/Standby motor group) Add-On Instruction provides
control of a parallel group of motors. Such groups are commonly used for a
Group (P_LLS) group of pumps that maintain pressure on a header despite wide changes in
demand, such as in municipal-scale or plant-scale water distribution.

Display Elements
A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced
multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix system, aid consistency and save engineering time.
Table 149 - P_LLS Display Elements
Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_P_LLS_Motors A group of motors.

GO_P_LLS_Blowers A group of blowers.

GO_P_LLS_Pumps A group of pumps.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 207

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator command source. Several features are common to all Add-On
Instructions faceplates. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.

3 5

4 6

Table 150 - Operator Tab Description

Item Description
1 Motor state indicator.
2 Individual motor state indicators.
3 Click to rotate motor assignments. The lead motor is demoted to the end of the list. Motors are started
or stopped to satisfy Number of Motors to Run.
4 Type a number between 0 and the maximum demand to indicate the number of motors to run.
5 Click to start group.
6 Click to stop group.
IMPORTANT: Motors stop in reverse order of starting unless First Started is First Stopped on the
engineering tab is checked.

208 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot, temporarily work around device
problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance. Several features are
common to all Add-On Instructions faceplates. See Basic Faceplate Attributes
on page 25

Table 151 - Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Check to place a motor in service (not in maintenance bypass).
Clear the checkbox to place a motor out of service (maintenance bypass)

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 209

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

Advanced Properties Display

The Advanced Properties Display opens to the engineering settings. The

Advanced Properties Display provides access to device configuration
parameters and ranges, and options for device and I/O setup. This tab is used
for initial system commissioning or later system changes.

Engineering Tab

7
8
9

1
2

3
4
5
6

Table 152 - Engineering Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Check to allow the Rotate command to rotate motor assignments.
2 Check to rotate the lead motor to the end of list upon stopping all motors.
3 Check so that the first motor that is started is the first motor that is stopped.
4 Check to allow the Operator Start or Stop command to reset any previous faults (Interlock Trip), then
start or stop the group.
Clear this checkbox to reset faults by using only the reset commands.
5 Check to allow the External Start or Stop command to reset any previous faults (Interlock Trip), then
start or stop the group.
Clear this checkbox to reset faults by using only the reset commands.
6 Check to bypass interlocks and permissives that are bypassable when in Override command source.
7 Type the number of motors (2…30) in the group.
8 Type the highest number of motors that can be running.
9 Type the lowest number of motors that can be running.

210 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

1
2

3
4

Table 153 - Engineering Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Check (= 1) so that the OCmd_Stop has priority and is accepted at any time. If the Command Source is
not Operator or Maintenance, the motor or drive requires a reset.
Clear this checkbox (= 0) so that the OCmd_Stop works only in Operator or Maintenance command
source.
2 Check (= 1) so that the XCmd_Stop has priority and is accepted at any time. If the Command Source is
not External, the motor or drive requires a reset.
Clear this checkbox (= 0) so that the XCmd_Stop only works when the command source is External.
3 Check to have Program settings (such as Speed Reference) track Operator settings in Operator
command source, and have Operator settings track Program settings in Program command source.
4 Check to have Program and Operator Speed Reference track the Override Speed Reference in Override
command source or the actual speed in Hand command source.
5 Type the number of seconds after a start or stop that the next start is allowed.
6 Type the number of seconds after a start or stop that the next stop is allowed.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 211

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

Table 154 - Engineering Tab Page 3 Description

Item Description
1 Click a number to open the corresponding Motor Configuration dialog box.

212 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

Motor Configuration Dialog Box

1
2

Table 155 - Motor Configuration Dialog Box Description

Item Description
1 Check to enable navigation to a motor object.
2 Type the name of the motor object to navigate to.
IMPORTANT: This field is only visible when Enable Navigation to Motor Object is checked.
3 Type the start priority within the list of the motors selected.
Motors start in order of priority (0...31) and the higher numbers start first.
4 Type the starting preference of the motor selected.
When two or more motors have the same priority, these motors start in the order of preference (0...31)
and the higher numbers start first.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 213

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

HMI Configuration Tab

The HMI configuration tab provides access to displayed text, and faceplate-to-
faceplate navigation settings. Configure the description, label, tag, and security
area for the device. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for the
description of the common attributes.

1
2

Table 156 - HMI Configuration Tab Description

Item Description
1 Check if a Permissive object is used with this motor. This check changes the Permissive indicator to a
clickable button to open the Permissive faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Permissive object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_Perm’. For example, if your P_LLS object has the name ’LLS123’, then its Permissive object
must be named ‘LLS123_Perm’.
2 Check if an Interlock object is used with this group. Checking this box changes the Interlock indicator to
a clickable button to open the Interlock faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Interlock object in the controller must be the object name with the
suffix ‘_Intlk’. For example, if your P_LLS object has the name’LLS123’, then its Interlock object must be
named ‘LLS123_Intlk’.

214 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family Chapter 4

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications that are helpful to diagnose or help
prevent device problems. The device problems can include specific reasons a
device is 'Not Ready', device warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and
predictive/preventive maintenance data.

The Diagnostics tab displays possible reasons for the device not being ready.
See Diagnostics Tab on page 28

Alarms Tab

The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the
alarms page changes color to show the current active alarm status. A blinking
alarm icon indicates that one or more alarms must be acknowledged or the
device must be reset. See Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm) on page 51 for
more information.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 215

Chapter 4 Regulatory and Procedural Control Family

Notes:

216 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Chapter 5

Motors Family

The Process Objects in this group provide control and monitoring for smart
motor controllers, drives, and overload relays.

Common Motors Faceplates Faceplate attributes are common to several Add-On Instructions in the motors
family. Attributes specific to a motor are detailed in the individual sections. If a
functionality is not enabled, the buttons are not visible. Common attributes
for motors are detailed in this section. Basic attributes are described in the
overview. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25

Common Operator Tab - Motors

4
5

2 6

Table 157 - Common Operator Tab Attributes

Item Description
1 Motor state (stopping, stopped, starting, or running)
2 Motor stop
3 Current command source (Program, Operator, Override, Maintenance, or Hand)
4 Click to start motor slow (motor run for single speed motors)
5 Click to start motor fast
6 Click to jog Motor

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 217

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Common Maintenance Tab - Motors

1 3

Table 158 - Common Maintenance Tab Attributes

Item Description
1 Click to open the runtime faceplate.
IMPORTANT: This option is only available if 'Enable navigation to run time object' on the HMI
Configuration tab is checked.
See Run Time and Start Counter (P_RunTime) on page 345
2 Click Yes to bypass checking of bypassable interlocks and permissives. Click No to enable checking of all
interlocks and permissives.
3 Click to open the Restart Inhibit faceplate.
IMPORTANT: This option is only available if 'Enable navigation to restart inhibit object' on the HMI
Configuration tab is checked.
See Restart Inhibit for Large Motor (P_ResInh) on page 347
4 Click to open the Overload faceplate.
IMPORTANT: This option is only available if 'Enable navigation to overload object' on the HMI
Configuration tab is checked.
5 Check to have this instruction use run feedback to check for motor Fail to Start or fail to Stop.
IMPORTANT: This option is only available if 'Motor has Run Feedback' on page 1 of the Engineering tab is
checked.

218 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Common Trends Tab - Motors

The Trends tab shows trend charts of key device data over time. These faceplate
trends provide a quick view of current device performance to supplement, but
not replace, dedicated historical or live trend displays. The trends displays are
common across all Motors Family Add-On Instructions

1
2

3 4 5 6 7 8 9

Table 159 - Common Trends Tab Description

Item Description
1 Setpoint
2 Process Variable
3 Click to view the oldest data available.
4 Click to move trend data back 2 minutes.
5 Click to move trend data back 1 minute.
6 Click to scroll new data.
7 Click to move trend data forward 1 minute.
8 Click to move trend data forward 2 minutes.
9 Click to move to the most current trend data.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 219

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Single-speed Motor The P_Motor (Single-speed Motor) Add-On Instruction controls a

non-reversing, single-speed motor in various command sources and monitors
(P_Motor) for fault conditions.

Display Elements (P_Motor)

A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced

multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix® system, aid consistency and save engineering time.
Table 160 - P_Motor Display Elements
Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_P_Motor_R Motors operate in different positions:
right, up, and down.
GO_P_Motor_U

GO_P_Motor_D

GO_P_Motor_Blower_R Blowers operate in different positions:

right, left, up, and down.
GO_P_Motor_Blower_L

GO_P_Motor_Blower_U

GO_P_Motor_Blower_D

GO_P_Motor_Conveyer_R Conveyor that is shown as a display

element.

220 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Table 160 - P_Motor Display Elements

Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_P_Motor_Inline_U Inline motors operate in several
positions: up, right, left, and down.
GO_P_Motor_Inline_R

GO_P_Motor_Inline_L

GO_P_Motor_Inline_D

GO_P_Motor_Pump_R Pumps operate in several positions: right,

left, and up.
GO_P_Motor_Pump_L

GO_P_Motor_Pump_U

GO_P_Motor_Agitator_D Agitator that is shown as a display

element.

GO_P_Motor_Mixer_U Mixer that is shown as a display element.

GO_P_Motor_RPump_U Rotary gear pump that is shown as a

display element.

GO_P_Motor_Fan_D Fan that is shown as a display element.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 221

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator command source. Several features are common to all Add-On
Instructions faceplates for the motors family. See Common Operator Tab -
Motors on page 217

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot, temporarily work around device
problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance. Several features are
common to all Add-On Instructions faceplates for the motors family.
See Common Maintenance Tab - Motors on page 218

222 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Advanced Properties Display

The Advanced Properties Display opens to the advanced maintenance settings.

The Advanced Properties Display provides access to device configuration
parameters and ranges, and options for device and I/O setup. This tab is used
for initial system commissioning or later system changes.

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Table 161 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type the time, in seconds, to allow the run feedback to show that the motor has started before raising a
fail to start alarm.
2 Type the time, in seconds, to allow the run feedback to show that the motor has stopped before raising a
fail to stop alarm.
3 Type the time, in seconds, for the maximum jog time for the motor.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 223

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Engineering Tab

1
2
3

4
5
6

7
8

Table 162 - Engineering Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Check if the motor provides a run feedback to Inp_RunFdbk.
Clear this checkbox if there is no run feedback.
IMPORTANT: This check places the device in Maintenance Bypass unless 'Use Run Feedback' on the
Maintenance tab is checked.
2 Check to allow the Operator Start or Stop command to reset any previous faults
(I/O fault, Fail to Start, Fail to Stop, or Interlock Trip), then start or stop motor.
Clear this checkbox to reset faults by using only the reset commands.
3 Check to allow the External Start or Stop command to reset any previous faults
(I/O fault, Fail to Start, Fail to Stop, or Interlock Trip), then start or stop motor.
Clear this checkbox to reset faults by using only the reset commands.
4 Check to enable the jog feature of the motor.
5 Check to allow the Operator Start or Stop command to reset any previous faults
(I/O fault, Fail to Start, Fail to Stop, or Interlock Trip), then start or stop motor.
Clear this checkbox to reset faults by using only the reset commands.
6 Check to have the Operator Stop command available in any command source.
Clear this checkbox to have the Operator Stop command available only in the Operator and Maintenance
command sources.
7 Check to have the External Stop command available in any command source.
Clear this checkbox to have the External Stop command available only in the Operator and Maintenance
command sources.
8 Check to allow local Start/Stop without alarm.
Clear this checkbox to allow start/stop by using only Program or Operator commands or Override Logic.

224 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

1
2
3

Table 163 - Engineering Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Check to stop the motor if an I/O fault is detected.
Clear this checkbox to show only the I/O fault status/alarm and not stop the motor if an I/O fault is
detected.
2 Check to stop the motor if a fail to Start fault is detected.
Clear this checkbox to show only the Fail to Start status/alarm and not stop the motor if a fail to Start fault
is detected.
3 The motor always stops on an interlock trip. This item cannot be unchecked. It is displayed as a reminder
that the Interlock Trip function always trips the motor.
4 Type the time (in seconds) the audible alarm sounds on a commanded start.
5 Set the time delay (in seconds) for running or stopped status to be echoed back when the simulation is
enabled or when run feedback is not used.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 225

Chapter 5 Motors Family

HMI Configuration Tab

The HMI configuration tab provides access to displayed text, and

faceplate-to-faceplate navigation settings. Configure the description, label, tag,
and security area for the device. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for
the description of the common attributes.

1
2
3

4
5

Table 164 - HMI Configuration Description

Item Description
1 Check if a Permissive object is used with this motor. This check changes the Permissive indicator to a
clickable button to open the Permissive faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Permissive object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_Perm’. For example, if your P_Motor object has the name ’Motor123’, then its Permissive
object must be named ‘Motor123_Perm’.
2 Check if an Interlock object is used with this motor. This check changes the Interlock indicator to a
clickable button to open the Interlock faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Interlock object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_Intlk’. For example, if your P_Motor object has the name’Motor123’, then its Interlock object
must be named ‘Motor123_Intlk’.
3 Check if a Restart Inhibit object is used with this motor. This check makes the Restart Inhibit button
visible.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Restart Inhibit object in the controller must be the name of the object
with the suffix ‘_ResInh’. For example, if your P_Motor object has the name ’Motor123’, then its Restart
Inhibit object must be named ‘Motor123_ResInh’.
4 Check if a Run Time object is used with this motor. This check makes the Run Time button visible.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Run Time object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_RunTime’. For example, if your P_Motor object has the name ‘Motor123’, then its Run Time
object must be named ‘Motor123_RunTime’.
5 Check if an Overload object is used with this motor. This check makes the Overload button visible.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Overload object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_Ovld’. For example, if your P_Motor object has the name ‘Motor123’, then its Overload
object must be named ‘Motor123_Ovld’

226 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications that are helpful to diagnose or help
prevent device problems. The device problems can include specific reasons a
device is 'Not Ready', device warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and
predictive/preventive maintenance data.

The Diagnostics tab displays possible reasons for the device not being ready.
See Diagnostics Tab on page 28

Alarms Tab

The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the
alarms page changes color to show the current active alarm status. A blinking
alarm icon indicates that one or more alarms must be acknowledged or the
device must be reset. See Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm) on page 51 for
more information.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 227

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Two-speed Motor The P_Motor2Spd (Two-speed Motor) Add-On Instruction controls a

non-reversing, two-speed motor (fast/slow/stopped) in various command
(P_Motor2Spd) sources and monitors for fault conditions.

Display Elements (P_Motor2Spd)

A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced

multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix system, aid consistency and save engineering time.
P_Motor2Spd uses the same Display Elements as P_Motor. See Display
Elements (P_Motor) on page 220

228 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator command source.

2
3
4
5

Table 165 - Operator Tab Description

Item Description
1 Motor state indicator.
2 Click to stop motor.
3 Click to start motor slow.
4 Click to start motor fast.
5 Click to jog motor.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 229

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot and temporarily work around
device problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance.

Table 166 - Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Click Yes to bypass checking of bypassable interlocks and permissives. Click No to enable checking of all
interlocks and permissives.
2 Click to open the Overload faceplate.
IMPORTANT: This option is only available if 'Enable navigation to overload object' on the HMI
Configuration tab is checked.
3 Check to have this instruction use run feedback to check for motor Fail to Start or fail to Stop.
IMPORTANT: This option is only available if 'Motor has Run Feedback' on page 1 of the Engineering tab
is checked.

230 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Advanced Properties Display

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Table 167 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type the time to allow the run feedback to show that the motor has started before raising a fail to start
alarm.
2 Type the time to allow the run feedback to show that the motor has stopped before raising a Fail to Stop
alarm.
3 Type the time to allow the motor to jog.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 231

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Engineering Tab

The Engineering tab is divided into two pages.

Engineering Tab Page 1

1
2
3

4
5
6

7
8

Table 168 - Engineering Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Check if the motor provides run feedback to Inp_SlowRunFdbk and Inp_FastRunFdbk.
Clear this checkbox if there is no run feedback.
IMPORTANT: This check places the device in Maintenance Bypass unless 'Use Run Feedback' on the
Maintenance tab is checked.
2 Check to allow the Operator commands for Start Slow, Start Fast, or Stop to reset any previous faults (I/
O fault, Fail to Start, Fail to Stop, Interlock Trip). Then start or stop motor.
Clear this checkbox to reset faults only using the reset code.
3 Check to allow the External commands for Start Slow, Start Fast, or Stop to reset any previous faults (I/
O fault, Fail to Start, Fail to Stop, Interlock Trip). Then start or stop motor.
Clear this checkbox to reset faults only using the reset code.
4 Check to allow motor to be jogged.
5 Check to bypass bypassable interlocks and permissives in Override command source.
6 Check to have the Operator Stop command available in any command source.
Clear this checkbox to have the Operator Stop command available only in the Operator and
Maintenance command sources.
7 Check to have the External Stop command available in any command source.
Clear this checkbox to have the External Stop command available only in the Operator and Maintenance
command sources.
8 Check to allow local Start/Stop without alarm.
Clear this checkbox to allow start/stop only using Program or Operator commands or Override Logic.

232 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Engineering Tab Page 2

1
2
3

Table 169 - Engineering Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Check to stop the motor if an I/O fault is detected.
Clear this checkbox to show only the I/O fault status/alarm and not stop the motor if an
I/O fault is detected.
2 Check to stop the motor if a fail to Start fault is detected.
Clear this checkbox to show only the Fail to Start status/alarm and not stop the motor if a fail to Start
fault is detected.
3 The motor always stops on an interlock trip. This item cannot be cleared. It is displayed as a reminder
that the Interlock Trip function always trips the motor.
4 Type the amount of time to sound the audible alarm when the motor starts.
5 Type the time delay between when the run output has turned off for one speed and when it is turned
on for the other speed.
6 Type the time delay (in seconds) for the running or stopped status to be echoed back when the
simulation is enabled or when run feedback is not used.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 233

Chapter 5 Motors Family

HMI Configuration Tab

The HMI configuration tab provides access to displayed text, and

faceplate-to-faceplate navigation settings. Configure the description, label, tag,
and security area for the device. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for
the description of the common attributes.

6
7

4
5

Table 170 - HMI Configuration Tab Description

Item Description
1 Check if a run slow or run fast permissive object is used with this motor.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Slow or Fast Permissive object in the controller must be the name of the
object with the suffix ‘_FastPerm’ or ‘_SlowPerm’. For example, if your P_Motor2Spd object has the
name ’Motor123’, then its Slow Permissive object must be named ‘Motor123_SlowPerm’ or its Fast
Permissive object must be named ‘Motor123_FastPerm’.
2 Check if an interlock object is used with this motor.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Interlock object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_Intlk’. For example, if your P_Motor2Spd object has the name ’Motor123’, then its Interlock
object must be named ‘Motor123_Intlk’.
3 Check if a restart inhibit object is used with this motor.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Restart Inhibit object in the controller must be the name of the object
with the suffix ‘_ResInh’. For example, if your P_Motor2Spd object has the name ’Motor123’, then its
Restart Inhibit object must be named ‘Motor123_ResInh’.
4 Check if a run time object is used with this motor.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Run Time object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_RunTime’. For example, if your P_Motor2Spd object has the name ‘Motor123’, then its Run
Time object must be named ‘Motor123_RunTime’.
5 Check if an overload object is used with this motor.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Overload object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_Ovld’. For example, if your P_Motor2Spd object has the name ‘Motor123’, then its Overload
object must be named ‘Motor123_Ovld’.
6 Type the text to display when the motor is running fast.
7 Type the text to display when the motor is running slow.

234 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications that are helpful to diagnose or help
prevent device problems. The device problems can include specific reasons a
device is 'Not Ready', device warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and
predictive/preventive maintenance data.

The Diagnostics tab displays possible reasons for the device not being ready.
See Diagnostics Tab on page 28

Alarms Tab
The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the
alarms page changes color to show the current active alarm status. A blinking
alarm icon indicates that one or more alarms must be acknowledged or the
device must be reset. See Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm) on page 51 for
more information.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 235

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Reversing Motor The P_MotorRev (Reversing Motor) Add-On Instruction controls a reversing,
motor (forward/reverse/stopped) in various command sources and monitors
(P_MotorRev) for fault conditions.

Display Elements (P_MotorRev)

A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced

multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix system, aid consistency and save engineering time. P_MotorRev
uses the same Display Elements as P_Motor. See Display Elements (P_Motor)
on page 220

236 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator command source. Several features are common to all Add-On
Instructions faceplates for the motors family. See Common Operator Tab -
Motors on page 217.

This instruction also includes a reverse button.

Table 171 - Operator Tab Description

Item Description
1 Click to start motor in reverse direction.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 237

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot, temporarily work around device
problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance. Several features are
common to all Add-On Instructions faceplates for the motors family.
See Common Maintenance Tab - Motors on page 218

238 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Advanced Properties Display

The Advanced Properties Display opens to the advanced maintenance settings.

The Advanced Properties Display provides access to device configuration
parameters and ranges, and options for device and I/O setup. This tab is used
for initial system commissioning or later system changes.

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Table 172 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type the time, in seconds, to allow the run feedback to show that the motor has started before raising a
fail to start alarm.
2 Type the time, in seconds, to allow the run feedback to show that the motor has stopped before raising a
fail to stop alarm.
3 Type the time, in seconds, for the maximum jog time for the motor.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 239

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Engineering Tab

1
2
3

4
5
6

7
8

Table 173 - Engineering Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Check if the motor provides run feedback to Inp_SlowRunFdbk and Inp_FastRunFdbk.
Clear this checkbox if there is no run feedback.
IMPORTANT: This check places the device in Maintenance Bypass unless 'Use Run Feedback' on the
Maintenance tab is checked.
2 Check to allow the Operator commands for Start Slow, Start Fast, or Stop, to reset any previous faults (I/
O fault, Fail to Start, Fail to Stop, Interlock Trip). Then start or stop motor.
Clear this checkbox to reset faults only using the reset code.
3 Check to allow the External commands for Start Slow, Start Fast, or Stop, to reset any previous faults (I/
O fault, Fail to Start, Fail to Stop, Interlock Trip). Then start or stop motor.
Clear this checkbox to reset faults only using the reset code.
4 Check to allow motor to be jogged.
5 Check to bypass bypassable interlocks and permissives in Override command source.
6 Check to have the Operator Stop command available in any command source.
Clear this checkbox to have the Operator Stop command available only in the Operator and
Maintenance command sources.
7 Check to have the External Stop command available in any command source.
Clear this checkbox to have the External Stop command available only in the Operator and Maintenance
command sources.
8 Check to allow local Start/Stop without alarm.
Clear this checkbox to allow start/stop only using Program or Operator commands or Override Logic.

240 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

1
2
3

Table 174 - Engineering Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Check to stop the motor if an I/O fault is detected.
Clear this checkbox to show only the I/O fault status/alarm and not stop the motor if an I/O fault is
detected.
2 Check to stop the motor if a fail to Start fault is detected.
Clear this checkbox to show only the Fail to Start status/alarm and not stop the motor if a fail to Start
fault is detected.
3 The motor always stops on an interlock trip. This item cannot be unchecked. It is displayed as a
reminder that the Interlock Trip function always trips the motor.
4 Type the time (in seconds) the audible alarm sounds on a commanded start.
5 Set the time delay (in seconds) for running or stopped status to be echoed back when the simulation is
enabled or when run feedback is not used.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 241

Chapter 5 Motors Family

HMI Configuration Tab

The HMI configuration tab provides access to displayed text, and

faceplate-to-faceplate navigation settings. Configure the description, label, tag,
and security area for the device. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for
the description of the common attributes.

7
8

1
2

3
4
5
6

Table 175 - HMI Configuration Description

Item Description
1 Check if a run forward permissive object is used with this motor. This check changes the Permissive
indicator to a clickable button to open the Permissive faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Permissive object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_Perm’. For example, if your P_Motor object has the name ’Motor123’, then its Permissive
object must be named ‘Motor123_Perm’.
2 Check if a run reverse Permissive object is used with this motor. This check changes the Permissive
indicator to a clickable button to open the Permissive faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Permissive object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_Perm’. For example, if your P_Motor object has the name ’Motor123’, then its Permissive
object must be named ‘Motor123_Perm’.
3 Check if an Interlock object is used with this motor. This check changes the Interlock indicator to a
clickable button to open the Interlock faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Interlock object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_Intlk’. For example, if your P_Motor object has the name’Motor123’, then its Interlock
object must be named ‘Motor123_Intlk’.
4 Check if a Restart Inhibit object is used with this motor. This check makes the Restart Inhibit button
visible.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Restart Inhibit object in the controller must be the name of the object
with the suffix ‘_ResInh’. For example, if your P_Motor object has the name ’Motor123’, then its Restart
Inhibit object must be named ‘Motor123_ResInh’.
5 Check if a RunTime object is used with this motor. This check makes the Run Time button visible.
IMPORTANT: The name of the RunTime object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_RunTime’. For example, if your P_Motor object has the name ‘Motor123’, then its Run Time
object must be named ‘Motor123_RunTime’.

242 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Table 175 - HMI Configuration Description

Item Description
6 Check if an Overload object is used with this motor. This check makes the Overload button visible.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Overload object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_Ovld’. For example, if your P_Motor object has the name ‘Motor123’, then its Overload
object must be named ‘Motor123_Ovld’
7 Type the text to display when the motor is running forward.
8 Type the text to display when the motor is running reverse.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 243

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications that are helpful to diagnose or help
prevent device problems. The device problems can include specific reasons a
device is 'Not Ready', device warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and
predictive/preventive maintenance data.

The Diagnostics tab displays possible reasons for the device not being ready.
See Diagnostics Tab on page 28

Alarms Tab

The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the
alarms page changes color to show the current active alarm status. A blinking
alarm icon indicates that one or more alarms must be acknowledged or the
device must be reset. See Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm) on page 51 for
more information.

244 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Hand-operated Motor The P_MotorHO (Hand-operated Motor) Add-On Instruction monitors a

locally controlled (hand-operated) motor.
(P_MotorHO)

Display Elements (P_MotorHO)

A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced

multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix system, aid consistency and save engineering time.

The P_MotorHO instruction has graphic symbols for motors, blowers,

agitators, and pumps for use on process graphic displays.

Table 176 - P_MotorHO Display Elements

Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_P_MotorHO_R Motors operating in different
GO_P_MotorHO_U positions.
GO_P_MotorHO_D

GO_P_MotorHO_Blower_R Blowers operating in different

GO_P_MotorHO_Blower_L positions.
GO_P_MotorHO_Blower_U
GO_P_MotorHO_Blower_D

GO_P_MotorHO_Conveyor_R Conveyor shown as a display

element.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 245

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Table 176 - P_MotorHO Display Elements

Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_P_MotorHO_Inline_U Inline motors operating in different
GO_P_MotorHO_Inline_R positions.
GO_P_MotorHO_Inline_L
GO_P_MotorHO_Inline_D

GO_P_MotorHO_Pump_R Pumps operating in different

GO_P_MotorHO_Pump_L positions.
GO_P_MotorHO_Pump_U

GO_P_MotorHO_Agitator_D Agitator shown as a display element.

GO_P_MotorHO_Mixer_U Mixer shown as a display element.

GO_P_MotorHO_RPump_U Rotary gear pump shown as a display

element.

GO_P_MotorHO_Fan_D Fan shown as a display element.

246 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator command source. Several features are common to all Add-On
Instructions faceplates for the motors family. See Common Operator Tab -
Motors on page 217.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 247

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot, temporarily work around device
problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance. Several features are
common to all Add-On Instruction faceplates for the motors family.

See Common Maintenance Tab - Motors on page 218

248 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Advanced Properties Display

The Advanced Properties Display opens to the advanced maintenance settings.

The Advanced Properties Display provides access to device configuration
parameters and ranges, and options for device and I/O setup. This tab is used
for initial system commissioning or later system changes.

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Table 177 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Enter the amount of time to allow motor run feedback to show that the motor stopped after a trip is
commanded. If the motor does not show stopped in the allowed time, a Trip Fail alarm is raised.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 249

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Engineering Tab

1
2

3
4

5
6

Table 178 - Engineering Tab Description

Item Description
1 Check if a trip output is connected to the P_MotorHO instruction to stop the motor on an interlock or trip
command. This check makes the trip (stop) command button visible on the Operator tab.
2 Check to allow the operator trip command to reset any previous faults (I/O fault, fail to trip, interlock trip)
then trip motor.
Clear this checkbox to reset faults by using only the reset command.
3 Check for a two speed (fast/slow) motor.
IMPORTANT: This option is unavailable if 'Motor is reversing' is checked.
Clear this checkbox for a reversing motor or a single-speed motor.
4 Check for a reversing (forward/reverse) motor.
IMPORTANT: This option is unavailable if 'Motor is 2 speed' is checked.
Clear this checkbox for a two-speed motor or a single-speed motor.
5 Check to send the trip output to the motor if an I/O fault is detected.
Clear this checkbox to show only the I/O fault status/alarm and not trip the motor if an I/O fault is
detected.
6 The motor always trips on an Interlock Trip. This item cannot be unchecked. It is displayed as a reminder
that the interlock trip function always trips the motor.
7 Check to keep sending the trip output to the motor on a trip, even if position feedback does not confirm
the motor stopped.
Clear this checkbox to stop sending the trip output to the motor when the motor trip times out and the
fail to trip status is set.
8 Type the amount of time (in seconds) the motor status shows tripping before showing a stopped or
running status when the motor is tripped and the I/O are being simulated (Inp_Sim = 1).

250 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

HMI Configuration Tab

The HMI configuration tab provides access to displayed text, and faceplate-to-
faceplate navigation settings. Configure the description, label, tag, and security
area for the device. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for the
description of the common attributes.

4
5

1
2

Table 179 - HMI Configuration Tab Description

Item Description
1 Check if an interlock object is connected to Inp_Intlk. This check changes the interlock indicator on the
Operator tab to a button that opens the interlocks faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Interlock object in the controller must be the name of the object with the
suffix ‘_Intlk’. For example, if your P_MotorHO object has the name’MotorHO123’, then its Interlock object
must be named ‘MotorHO123_Intlk’.
2 Check if a Run Time instruction is connected to the status of this instruction for accumulating total motor
run time and number of starts. This check displays the ‘hour meter’ button, which opens the run time
faceplate, visible on the Operator tab.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Run Time object in the controller must be the name of the object with the
suffix ‘_RunTime’. For example, if your P_MotorHO object has the name ‘MotorHO123’, then its Run Time
object must be named ‘MotorHO123_RunTime’.
3 Check if an Overload object is connected. This check displays the button, which opens the Overload
faceplate, visible on the Operator tab.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Overload object in the controller must be the name of the object with the
suffix ‘_Ovld’. For example, if your P_MotorHO object has the name ‘MotorHO123’, then its Overload
object must be named ‘MotorHO123_Ovld’.
4 Type the text to show after ‘running’ when a 2-speed motor is running fast.
5 Type the text to show after ‘running’ when a 2-speed motor is running slow.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 251

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications that are helpful to diagnose or help
prevent device problems. The device problems can include specific reasons a
device is 'Not Ready', device warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and
predictive/preventive maintenance data.

The Diagnostics tab displays possible reasons for the device not being ready.
See Diagnostics Tab on page 28

Alarms Tab

The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the
alarms page changes color to show the current active alarm status. A blinking
alarm icon indicates that one or more alarms must be acknowledged or the
device must be reset. See Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm) on page 51 for
more information.

252 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Discrete 2-, 3-, 4-state Device The P_D4SD (Discrete 2-, 3-, 4-state Device) Add-On Instruction controls
and monitors feedback from a discrete 2-state, 3-state, or 4-state device in
(P_D4SD) various command sources, monitoring for fault conditions. These devices
include
multiple-speed motors or multiple-position valves.

Display Elements (P_D4SD)

A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced

multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix system, aid consistency and save engineering time.
Table 180 - P_D4SD Display Elements Description
Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_P_D4SD_4Way Three/Four-Way Valve.
The Three/Four-way Valve parameters
define the inlet and output ports of the
valve:
• No. 110 - Top port open state
• No. 111 - Right port open state
• No. 112 - Bottom port open state
• No. 113 - Left port open state

• 0 = Inlet (always shown as open)

• 1 = Open when Val_Sts = 1 (state 0)
• 2 = Open when Val_Sts = 2 (state 1)
• 3 = Open when Val_Sts = 3 (state 2)
• 4 = Open when Val_Sts = 4 (state 3)
GO_P_D4SD_3Way_SORt Two-Way Solenoid-operated Diverter Valve
in different positions: right, left, bottom,
and top.
Parameters define the inlet and output
ports of the Two-way Solenoid-operated
GO_P_D4SD_3Way_SOLt Diverter Valve.

GO_P_D4SD_3Way_SOBtm

GO_P_D4SD_3Way_SOTop

GO_P_D4SD_Diverter Two Way Diverter Valve in open top-left and

open top-right positions.
The Two-way Diverter Valve parameters
define the state of the valve:
• State 0: Open top-left
GO_P_D4SD_Diverter1 • State 1: Open top-right
• State 2: —
• State 3: —

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 253

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Table 180 - P_D4SD Display Elements Description

Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_P_D4SD_3WayMO_Rt Two-Way Motor-operated Diverter Valve in
different positions: right, left, bottom, and
top.
Parameters define the inlet and output
ports of the Two-way Motor-operated
GO_P_D4SD_3WayMO_Lt Diverter Valve.

GO_P_D4SD_3WayMO_Btm

GO_P_D4SD_3WayMO_Top

GO_P_D4SD_R Motors in different positions: right, up, and

down.

GO_P_D4SD_U

GO_P_D4SD_D

GO_P_D4SD_Blower_R Blowers in different positions: right, left, up,

and down.

GO_P_D4SD_Blower_L

GO_P_D4SD_Blower_U

GO_P_D4SD_Blower_D

254 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Table 180 - P_D4SD Display Elements Description

Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_P_D4SD_Conveyor-R Conveyor

GO_P_D4SD_Inline_U Inline Motors in different positions: up, left,

down, and right.

GO_P_D4SD_Inline_L

GO_P_D4SD_Inline_D

GO_P_D4SD_Inline_R

GO_P_D4SD_Pump_R Pumps in different positions: right, left, and

up.

GO_P_D4SD_Pump_L

GO_P_D4SD_Pump_U

GO_P_D4SD_Agitator_D Agitator in down position.

GO_P_D4SD_Mixer_U Mixer in up position.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 255

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Table 180 - P_D4SD Display Elements Description

Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_P_D4SD_RPump_U Rotary Gear Pump in up position.

GO_P_D4SD_Fan_D Fan in down position.

256 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator command source. Several features are common to all Add-On
Instructions faceplates for the motors family. See Common Operator Tab -
Motors on page 217.

Table 181 - Operator Tab Description

Item Description
1 Device state indicator
2 Move to state command buttons

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 257

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot, temporarily work around device
problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance. Several features are
common to all Add-On Instructions faceplates for the motors family.
See Common Maintenance Tab - Motors on page 218

258 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Advanced Properties Display

The Advanced Properties Display opens to the advanced maintenance settings.

The Advanced Properties Display provides access to device configuration
parameters and ranges, and options for device and I/O setup. This tab is used
for initial system commissioning or later system changes.

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Table 182 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type a value (0…2,147,483.647) to indicate the time (seconds) to energize outputs to the device to be
sure that they are latched in.
(0 = output held continuously)
2 Type a value (0…2,147,483.647) to indicate the time (seconds) to allow the device to reach the
commanded state before issuing a fault.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 259

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Engineering Tab

The engineering tab is divided into two pages.

3
4
5

Table 183 - Engineering Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Click to select the number of states.
2 Check to reset a fault upon a new operator command.
3 Check to reset a fault upon a new external command.
4 Check (= 1) to make Operator State 0 (OCmd_St0) available in any command source.
Clear this checkbox (= 0) to make Operator State 0 (OCmd_St0) available only in Operator or
Maintenance command source.
5 Check (= 1) to make External State 0 (XCmd_St0) available in any command source.
Clear this checkbox (= 0) to make External State 0 (XCmd_St0) available only in Operator or
Maintenance command source.
6 Click a state to open the P_D4SD State Configuration display for that state.

This display directs how the P_D4SD instruction commands the device state via outputs and
determines the actual device state via feedback inputs. The first two columns for output set
parameters, Cfg_OutSt[x]Write, and Cfg_OutSt[x]Value, determine how outputs are written to
command to a state. The second two columns for feedback set parameters, Cfg_FdbkSt[x]Check, and
Cfg_FdbkSt[x]State, determine how the state is interpreted from the
input values.

260 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

1
2
3
4
5

Table 184 - Engineering Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Check to shed if a Device Fault is detected.
2 Check to shed if an I/O Fault is detected.
3 Check to shed if target state is not reached.
4 The device always sheds an Interlock Trip. This item cannot be unchecked. It is displayed as a reminder
that the Interlock Trip function always triggers a shed.
5 Click to determine whether you hold position or go to state 0 upon a shed condition.
6 Type a value (seconds) to indicate the delay to echo back reaching the state when in simulation.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 261

Chapter 5 Motors Family

HMI Configuration Tab

The HMI configuration tab provides access to displayed text, and faceplate-to-
faceplate navigation settings. Configure the description, label, tag, and security
area for the device. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for the
description of the common attributes.

Table 185 - HMI Configuration Description

Item Description
1 Check if the corresponding north, south, east, or west Permissive object is used with this device. This
check changes the Permissive Indicator to a button that accesses the Permissive faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Permissives object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_Perm#’, where ‘#’ is the permissive number (0…3) For example, if your P_D4SD object has
the name ’D4SD123’, then its Permissives object must be named ‘D4SD123_Perm0’.
2 Type text to describe the state.

262 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications that are helpful to diagnose or help
prevent device problems. The device problems can include specific reasons a
device is 'Not Ready', device warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and
predictive/preventive maintenance data.

The Diagnostics tab displays possible reasons for the device not being ready.
See Diagnostics Tab on page 28

Alarms Tab

The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the
alarms page changes color to show the current active alarm status. A blinking
alarm icon indicates that one or more alarms must be acknowledged or the
device must be reset. See Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm) on page 51 for
more information.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 263

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Variable Speed Drive (P_VSD) The P_VSD (Variable Speed Drive) Add-On Instruction is used to operate one
variable speed motor by using a drive (AC variable frequency or DC) in various
command sources, monitoring for fault conditions.

Display Elements (P_VSD)

A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced

multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix system, aid consistency and save engineering time.
Table 186 - P_VSD Display Elements Description
Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_P_VSD Motors operate in different
positions: right, up, and down.
GO_P_VSD_1

GO_P_VSD_4

GO_P_VSD_Blower_1 Blowers operate in different

positions: right, left, up, and down.
GO_P_VSD_Blower_2

GO_P_VSD_Blower_3

GO_P_VSD_Blower_4

264 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Table 186 - P_VSD Display Elements Description

Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_P_VSD_Conveyer_Lt2Rt Conveyor shown as a display
element.

GO_P_VSD_Inline_1 Inline Motors operate in several

positions: up, right, left, and down.
GO_P_VSD_Inline_2

GO_P_VSD_Inline_3

GO_P_VSD_Inline_4

GO_P_VSD_Pump_1 Pumps operate in several positions:

right, left, and up.
GO_P_VSD_Pump_2

GO_P_VSD_Pump_3

GO_P_VSD_Agitator Agitator shown as a display

element.

GO_P_VSD_Mixer Mixer shown as a display element.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 265

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Table 186 - P_VSD Display Elements Description

Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_P_VSD_RotPump Rotary Gear Pump shown as a
display element.

GO_P_VSD_Fan Fan shown as a display element.

266 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator command source. Several features are common to all Add-On
Instructions faceplates for the motors family. See Common Operator Tab -
Motors on page 217.

2
3

Table 187 - Operator Tab Description

Item Description
1 Current speed of drive
2 Setpoint for the speed of the drive
3 Start motor in reverse

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 267

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot, temporarily work around device
problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance. Several features are
common to all Add-On Instructions faceplates for the motors family.
See Common Maintenance Tab - Motors on page 218

Table 188 - Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type the clamping limits for the speed setpoint. If a speed setpoint outside this range is entered, the
speed is clamped at these limits and Sts_SpeedLimited is asserted.

268 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Advanced Properties Display

The Advanced Properties Display opens to the advanced maintenance settings.

The Advanced Properties Display provides access to device configuration
parameters and ranges, and options for device and I/O setup. This tab is used
for initial system commissioning or later system changes.

Advanced Maintenance Tab

3
4

Table 189 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type the amount of time to hold Out_Reset true to reset a drive fault when a reset command is
received.
2 Type the amount of time to allow for the run feedback on the drive to confirm that the drive has started
before raising a Fail to Start alarm.
3 Type the amount of time to allow for the run feedback on the drive to confirm that the drive has
stopped before raising a Fail to Stop alarm.
TIP: Allow extra time for the drive to decelerate or coast to zero speed before it returns a confirmed
Stopped status.
4 Type the maximum amount of time allowed to jog the motor.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 269

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Engineering Tab

The engineering tab has five pages.

1
2
5
6

7
8

3
4
9
10

If Speed Feedback is disabled on page 2 of the Engineering tab, the Speed

Feedback part (above dashed line) of the preceding image is not displayed and
the loopback options are not available.

Table 190 - Engineering Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Enter the raw input count that corresponds to the maximum speed feedback from the drive
2 Enter the raw input count that corresponds to the minimum speed feedback from the drive. (This value
is usually zero.)
3 Enter the engineering unit value for the maximum speed reference sent to the drive.
4 Enter the engineering unit value for the minimum speed reference sent to the drive. (This value is
usually zero. Do not enter a negative value for reversing drives. Reversing is handled separately.)
5 Enter the engineering unit value for the maximum speed feedback from the drive.
6 Enter the engineering unit value for the minimum speed feedback from the drive.
(This value is usually zero. Do not enter a negative value for reversing drives. Reversing is handled
separately.)
7 Enter the text of the units of measure of the scaled speed feedback. (Units of measure are often Hz,
RPM, or Percent.)
8 Enter the text of the units of measure of the scaled speed reference. (Units of measure are often Hz,
RPM, or Percent.)
9 Enter the raw output count that corresponds to the maximum speed reference sent to the drive.
10 Enter the raw output count that corresponds to the minimum speed reference sent to the drive. (This
value is usually zero.)

270 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

1
2
3

5
6

7
8

9
10

Table 191 - Engineering Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Check if the drive provides a run feedback signal. This check enables feedback checking for Fail to Start
and Fail to Stop.
Clear this checkbox if there is no run feedback.
2 Check if the drive provides speed feedback on Inp_SpeedFdbk.
3 Check if Speed feedback greater than zero is used to signify the drive is running.
IMPORTANT: This configuration setting is available only if the previous configuration setting is
checked.
4 Check to reset the faults when a new operator command is issued.
Clear this checkbox for ‘reset required’ to clear fault.
5 Check to reset the faults when a new External command is issued.
Clear this checkbox for ‘reset required’ to clear fault.
6 Check to make the Jog command button visible on the Operator tab and enable the drive to be jogged
from the faceplate.
7 Check to make the forward and reverse direction command buttons visible on the Operator tab and
enable the drive to run forward or reverse.
8 Check to have the interlocks and permissives that can be bypassed, bypassed in Override command
source.
9 Check (= 1) so that the OCmd_Stop has priority and is accepted at any time. If the Command Source is
not Operator or Maintenance, the motor or drive requires a reset.
Clear this checkbox (= 0) so that the OCmd_Stop works only in Operator or Maintenance command
source.
10 Check (= 1) so that the XCmd_Stop has priority and is accepted at any time. If the Command Source is
not External, the motor or drive requires a reset.
Clear this checkbox (= 0) so that the XCmd_Stop only works when the command source is External.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 271

Chapter 5 Motors Family

1
2

3
4
5

Table 192 - Engineering Tab Page 3 Description

Item Description
1 Check to have Program settings, such as Speed Reference, track Operator settings in Operator command
source, and have Operator settings track Program settings in Program command source.
2 Check to have Program and Operator Speed Reference track the Override Speed Reference in Override
command source or the actual speed in Hand command source.
3 Check to stop the drive if an I/O Fault is detected.
Clear this checkbox show the I/O Fault Status/Alarm only and not stop the drive if an I/O Fault is
detected.
4 When the bit is on and a motor Fail to Start is detected, the drive is stopped. A reset is required before
another start can be attempted.
If the bit is off and a drive Fail to Start is detected, the instruction sets only the Sts_FailToStart status
(and the Alm_FailToStart alarm, if so configured). The outputs are not changed, so the instruction
continues to start the drive.
5 The drive always stops on an Interlock trip. This item cannot be unchecked. It is displayed as a reminder
that the Interlock Trip function always stops
the drive.

272 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

2
3

Table 193 - Engineering Tab Page 4 Description

Item Description
1 Check to keep control of the drive Speed Reference with the Operator, Program, External, or Follow the
Source even if the instruction is in Program command source.
2 Check to keep control of the drive Start, Stop, and Jog commands with the Operator, Program, External,
or Follow the Source, even if the instruction is in Operator command source.
IMPORTANT: The Program cannot Jog the drive, even if Jogging is enabled.
3 Check to keep control of the Output Datalink Setting (if used) with the Operator, Program, External, or
Follow the Source even if the instruction is in Program command source.
4 Type the time (in seconds) the audible alarm sounds on a commanded start.
5 Enter the time, in seconds, to ramp speed feedback when in Simulation.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 273

Chapter 5 Motors Family

2 6

4 8

Engineering Tab Page 5 Description

Item Description
1 Check if Inp_Datalink is used. This check makes the Input Datalink configuration and operation
functions visible.
2 Configure the minimum and maximum raw (from the drive) units for the Input Datalink.
3 Check if Out_Datalink is used. This check makes the Output Datalink configuration and operation
functions visible.
4 Configure the minimum and maximum scaled values for the Output Datalink in Engineering Units.
5 Enter the text to display the units of measure for the Output Datalink.
6 Configure the minimum and maximum scaled values for the Input Datalink in Engineering Units.
7 Type the text to display the units of measure for the Input Datalink.
8 Configure the minimum and maximum scaled values for the Output Datalink in Raw (to the drive)
Units. Enter the text to display for the label and units of measure of the Output Datalink.

274 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

HMI Configuration Tab

The HMI configuration tab provides access to displayed text, and faceplate-to-
faceplate navigation settings. Configure the description, label, tag, and security
area for the device. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for the
description of the common attributes.

1
2
3
4

6
7

Table 194 - HMI Configuration Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Type a name for forward direction.
2 Type a name for reverse direction.
3 Type the text to display for the label of the Input Datalink.
4 Type the text to display for the label of the Output Datalink.
5 Type the number of decimal places to be shown for actual speed.
6 Type the number of decimal places to be shown for input datalink.
7 Type the number of decimal places to be shown for output datalink.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 275

Chapter 5 Motors Family

1
2
3
4

Table 195 - HMI Configuration Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Check if a permissive object is connected to Inp_FwdPermOK. The Permissive indicator becomes a
button that opens the permissive faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Forward Permissive object in the controller must be the name of the
object with the suffix ‘_FwdPerm’. For example, if your P_PF52x object has the name ’Drive123’, then
its Forward Permissive object must be named ‘Drive123_FwdPerm’.
2 Check if a permissive object is connected to Inp_RevPermOK. The Permissive indicator becomes a
button that opens the permissive faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Reverse Permissive object in the controller must be the name of the
object with the suffix ‘_RevPerm’. For example, if your P_PF52x object has the name ’Drive123’, then its
Reverse Permissive object must be named ‘Drive123_RevPerm’.
3 Check if an interlock object is connected to Inp_IntlkOK. The Interlock indicator becomes a button that
opens the interlock faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Interlock object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_Intlk’. For example, if your P_PF52x object has the name ’Drive123’, then its Interlock object
must be named ‘Drive123_Intlk’.
4 Check if a restart inhibit object is connected. The button that opens the Restart Inhibit faceplate
appears.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Restart Inhibit object in the controller must be the name of the object
with the suffix ‘_ResInh’. For example, if your P_PF52x object has the name ’Drive123’, then its Restart
Inhibit object must be named ‘Drive123_ResInh’.
5 Check if a runtime object is connected. The button that opens the runtime faceplate appears.
IMPORTANT: The name of the runtime object in the controller must be the name of the object with the
suffix ‘_RunTime’. For example, if your P_PF52x object has the name ‘Drive123’, then its runtime object
must be named ‘Drive123_RunTime’.

276 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications that are helpful to diagnose or help
prevent device problems. The device problems can include specific reasons a
device is 'Not Ready', device warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and
predictive/preventive maintenance data.

The Diagnostics tab displays possible reasons for the device not being ready.
See Diagnostics Tab on page 28

Alarms Tab

The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the
alarms page changes color to show the current active alarm status. A blinking
alarm icon indicates that one or more alarms must be acknowledged or the
device must be reset. See Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm) on page 51 for
more information.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 277

Chapter 5 Motors Family

PowerFlex® 523/525 Variable The P_PF52x (PowerFlex 523/525 Variable Frequency Drives) object is used
to control and monitor a PowerFlex 523 variable-frequency drive with optional
Frequency Drives (P_PF52x) EtherNet/IP Interface. The P_PF52x can also control and monitor a
PowerFlex 525 variable-frequency drive with embedded or optional add-on
EtherNet/IP Interface.

Display Elements (P_PF52x)

A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced

multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix system, aid consistency and save engineering time.

The P_PF52x instruction uses the same HMI display elements that are used
for the Variable Speed Drive (P_VSD) instruction. See Display Elements
(P_VSD) on page 264

278 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator command source. Several features are common to all Add-On
Instructions faceplates for the motors family. See Common Operator Tab -
Motors on page 217.

2 3
4

Table 196 - Operator Tab Description

Item Description
1 Current speed of drive.
2 Setpoint for the speed of the drive.
3 Jog drive in reverse.
4 start drive in reverse.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 279

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot, temporarily work around device
problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance. Several features are
common to all Add-On Instructions faceplates for the motors family.
See Common Maintenance Tab - Motors on page 218

Table 197 - Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type the clamping limits for the speed setpoint. If a speed setpoint outside this range is entered, the
speed is clamped at these limits and Sts_SpeedLimited is asserted.

280 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Advanced Properties Display

The Advanced Properties Display opens to the advanced maintenance settings.

The Advanced Properties Display provides access to device configuration
parameters and ranges, and options for device and I/O setup. This tab is used
for initial system commissioning or later system changes.

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Table 198 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type the amount of time to hold Out_Reset true to reset a drive fault when a reset command is
received.
2 Type the amount of time for the run feedback of the drive to confirm that the drive has started before
raising a Fail to Start alarm.
3 Type the amount of time for the run feedback of the drive to confirm that the drive has stopped before
raising a Fail to Stop alarm.
4 Type the maximum amount of time allowed to jog the motor.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 281

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Engineering Tab

The Engineering tab has four pages.

4
5

6
2

Table 199 - Engineering Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Type the raw input count that corresponds to the maximum and minimum (This value is typically zero.)
speed feedback from the drive
2 Type the engineering unit value for the maximum and minimum (typically zero) speed reference sent
to the drive.
Do not enter a negative value for reversing drives. Reversing is handled separately.
3 Type the engineering unit value for the maximum and minimum (typically zero) speed feedback from
the drive.
Do not enter a negative value for reversing drives. Reversing is handled separately.
4 Type the text of the units of measure of the scaled speed feedback. (typically Hz, RPM, or Percent.)
5 Type the text of the units of measure of the scaled speed reference. (typically Hz, RPM, or Percent.)
6 Click the Simulation option (left, middle, or right) that corresponds to how the speed feedback for the
drive is to be determined from the speed reference when the drive is being simulated (Inp_Sim = 1).
Click the left option to copy the speed reference in engineering units to the speed feedback. (The
simulated feedback is ramped to act like a drive that is accelerating or decelerating.) Use this option if
the speed reference and speed feedback use the same scaling parameters
Click the middle option to scale the simulated feedback from the speed-reference engineering unit
range to the speed-feedback engineering unit range. Use this setting if the speed reference and speed
feedback have different engineering ranges. For example, percent for reference and Hz for feedback),
but the maximum reference (for example, 100%) corresponds to the maximum feedback (for example,
3600 RPM.
Click the right option to scale the speed reference to raw units, copy the speed reference in raw units to
speed feedback raw units, and scale to speed feedback engineering units. Use this setting if the
reference and feedback ranges do not correspond.
7 Type the raw output count that corresponds to the maximum and minimum (This value is typically
zero.) speed reference sent to the drive.

282 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

1
2

3
4

5
6

7
8
9
10

Table 200 - Engineering Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Check to reset faults on a new Operator command.
Clear this checkbox if a reset is required to clear faults.
2 Check to reset faults on a new External command.
Clear this checkbox if a reset is required to clear faults.
3 Check to make the Jog command button visible on the Operator tab and enable the drive to be jogged
from the faceplate.
4 Check to make the forward and reverse direction command buttons visible on the Operator tab and
enable the drive to run forward or reverse.
5 Check to have the interlocks and permissives that can be bypassed, bypassed in Override command
source.
6 Check (= 1) so that the OCmd_Stop has priority and is accepted at any time. If the Command Source is
not Operator or Maintenance, the motor or drive requires a reset.
Clear this checkbox (= 0) so that the OCmd_Stop works only in Operator or Maintenance command
source.
7 Check (= 1) so that the XCmd_Stop has priority and is accepted at any time. If the Command Source is
not External, the motor or drive requires a reset.
Clear this checkbox (= 0) so that the XCmd_Stop only works when the command source is External.
8 Check (= 1) to let local circuits start/stop the drive without an alarm.
Clear this checkbox (= 0) to start/stop the drive from the HMI or program only.
9 Check to have program settings, such as Speed Reference, track operator settings in Operator command
source, and have operator settings track Program Settings in Program command source.
10 Check to have the Program and Operator Speed Reference track the Override Speed Reference in
Override command source or the actual speed in Hand command source.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 283

Chapter 5 Motors Family

1
2
3

4
5

Table 201 - Engineering Tab Page 3 Description

Item Description
1 Check to stop the drive if an I/O Fault is detected. After the I/O Fault clears, a reset is required before the
drive can be started.
Clear this checkbox to show only the I/O Fault Status/Alarm and not stop the drive if an I/O Fault is
detected.
2 Check to stop the drive on a failure to start. A reset is required before another start can be attempted.
Clear this checkbox to show only the Fail to Start status and alarm on a failure to start. The outputs are
not changed, so the instruction continues to attempt to start the motor.
3 The drive always stops on an Interlock trip. This item cannot be cleared. It is displayed as a reminder
that the Interlock Trip function always stops the drive.
4 Check to keep control of the drive Speed Reference with the Operator, Program, External, or Follow the
Source even if the instruction is in Program command source.
Clear this checkbox to have control of the drive Speed Reference follow the Instruction command
source.
5 Check to keep control of the drive Start and Stop commands with the Operator, Program, External, or
Follow the Source, even if the instruction is in Operator command source.
IMPORTANT: The Program cannot Jog the drive, even if Jogging is enabled.
Clear this checkbox to have control of the drive Start, Stop, and Jog follow Instruction command source.

284 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Table 202 - Engineering Tab Page 4 Description

Item Description
1 Type the time (in seconds) the audible alarm sounds on a commanded start.
2 Type the time, in seconds, to ramp speed feedback when in Simulation.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 285

Chapter 5 Motors Family

HMI Configuration Tab

The HMI configuration tab provides access to displayed text, and faceplate-to-
faceplate navigation settings. Configure the description, label, tag, and security
area for the device. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for the
description of the common attributes.

The HMI configuration tab has two pages.

1
2

Table 203 - HMI Configuration Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Type a name for forward direction.
2 Type a name for reverse direction.
3 Type names for the digital inputs.
4 Type the number of decimal places to be shown for actual speed.

286 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

1
2

3
4

Table 204 - HMI Configuration Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Check if a permissive object is connected to Inp_FwdPermOK. The Permissive indicator becomes a
button that opens the permissive faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Forward Permissive object in the controller must be the name of the
object with the suffix ‘_FwdPerm’. For example, if your P_PF52x object has the name ’Drive123’, then
its Forward Permissive object must be named ‘Drive123_FwdPerm’.
2 Check if a permissive object is connected to Inp_RevPermOK. The Permissive indicator becomes a
button that opens the permissive faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Reverse Permissive object in the controller must be the name of the
object with the suffix ‘_RevPerm’. For example, if your P_PF52x object has the name ’Drive123’, then its
Reverse Permissive object must be named ‘Drive123_RevPerm’.
3 Check if an interlock object is connected to Inp_IntlkOK. The Interlock indicator becomes a button that
opens the interlock faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Interlock object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_Intlk’. For example, if your P_PF52x object has the name ’Drive123’, then its Interlock object
must be named ‘Drive123_Intlk’.
4 Check if a restart inhibit object is connected. The button that opens the Restart Inhibit faceplate
appears.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Restart Inhibit object in the controller must be the name of the object
with the suffix ‘_ResInh’. For example, if your P_PF52x object has the name ’Drive123’, then its Restart
Inhibit object must be named ‘Drive123_ResInh’.
5 Check if a runtime object is connected. The button that opens the runtime faceplate appears.
IMPORTANT: The name of the runtime object in the controller must be the name of the object with the
suffix ‘_RunTime’. For example, if your P_PF52x object has the name ‘Drive123’, then its runtime object
must be named ‘Drive123_RunTime’.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 287

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Trends Tab

The Trends tab shows trend charts of key device data over time. These faceplate
trends provide a quick view of current device performance to supplement, but
not replace, dedicated historical or live trend displays. The trends displays are
common across all Motors Family Add-On Instructions. See Common Trends
Tab - Motors on page 219

Alarms Tab

The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the
alarms page changes color to show the current active alarm status. A blinking
alarm icon indicates that one or more alarms must be acknowledged or the
device must be reset. See Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm) on page 51 for
more information.

288 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

PowerFlex 753 Drive The P_PF753 (PowerFlex 753 Drive) object is used to operate one
variable-speed motor by using a PowerFlex 753 AC variable frequency drive in
(P_PF753) various command sources, and monitoring for fault conditions.

Display Elements (P_PF753)

A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced

multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix system, aid consistency and save engineering time.

The P_PF753 instruction uses the same HMI display elements that are used
for the Variable Speed Drive (P_VSD) instruction. See Display Elements
(P_VSD) on page 264

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 289

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator command source. Several features are common to all Add-On
Instructions faceplates for the motors family. See Common Operator Tab -
Motors on page 217.

Table 205 - Operator Tab Description

Item Description
1 Current speed of drive
2 Setpoint for the speed of the drive

290 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot, temporarily work around device
problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance. Several features are
common to all Add-On Instructions faceplates for the motors family.
See Common Maintenance Tab - Motors on page 218

Table 206 - Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type the clamping limits for the speed setpoint. If a speed setpoint outside this range is entered, the
speed is clamped at these limits and Sts_SpeedLimited is asserted.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 291

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Advanced Properties Display

The Advanced Properties Display opens to the advanced maintenance settings.

The Advanced Properties Display provides access to device configuration
parameters and ranges, and options for device and I/O setup. This tab is used
for initial system commissioning or later system changes.

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Table 207 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type the amount of time to hold Out_Reset true to reset a drive fault when a reset command is
received.
2 Type the amount of time for the run feedback of the drive to confirm that the drive has started before
raising a Fail to Start alarm.
3 Type the amount of time for the run feedback of the drive to confirm that the drive has stopped before
raising a Fail to Stop alarm.
4 Type the maximum amount of time allowed to jog the motor.

292 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Engineering Tab

The engineering tab has four pages.

4
5

6
2

Table 208 - Engineering Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Type the raw input count that corresponds to the maximum and minimum (This value is usually zero.)
speed feedback from the drive
2 Type the engineering unit value for the maximum and minimum (usually zero) speed reference sent to
the drive.
Do not enter a negative value for reversing drives. Reversing is handled separately.
3 Type the engineering unit value for the maximum and minimum (usually zero) speed feedback from
the drive.
Do not enter a negative value for reversing drives. Reversing is handled separately.
4 Type the text of the units of measure of the scaled speed feedback. (Often Hz, RPM, or Percent.)
5 Type the text of the units of measure of the scaled speed reference. (Often Hz, RPM, or Percent.)
6 Click the Simulation option (left, middle, or right) that corresponds to how the speed feedback for the
drive is to be determined from the speed reference when the drive is being simulated (Inp_Sim = 1).
Click the left option to copy the speed reference in engineering units to the speed feedback. (The
simulated feedback is ramped to act like a drive that is accelerating or decelerating.) Use this option if
the speed reference and speed feedback use the same scaling parameters
Click the middle option to scale the simulated feedback from the speed-reference engineering unit
range to the speed-feedback engineering unit range. Use this setting if the speed reference and speed
feedback have different engineering ranges. For example, percent for reference and Hz for feedback),
but the maximum reference (for example, 100%) corresponds to the maximum feedback (for example,
3600 RPM.
Click the right option to scale the speed reference to raw units, copy the speed reference in raw units to
speed feedback raw units, and scale to speed feedback engineering units. Use this setting if the
reference and feedback ranges do not correspond.
7 Type the raw output count that corresponds to the maximum and minimum (This value is usually zero.)
speed reference sent to the drive.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 293

Chapter 5 Motors Family

1
2

3
4

5
6

7
8
9
10

Table 209 - Engineering Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Check to reset faults on a new Operator command.
Clear this checkbox if a reset is required to clear faults.
2 Check to reset faults on a new External command.
Clear this checkbox if a reset is required to clear faults.
3 Check to make the Jog command button visible on the Operator tab and enable the drive to be jogged
from the faceplate
4 Check to make the forward and reverse direction command buttons visible on the Operator tab and
enable the drive to run forward or reverse.
5 Check to have the interlocks and permissives that can be bypassed, bypassed in Override command
source.
6 Check (= 1) so that the OCmd_Stop has priority and is accepted at any time. If the Command Source is
not Operator or Maintenance, the motor or drive requires a reset.
Clear this checkbox (= 0) so that the OCmd_Stop works only in Operator or Maintenance command
source.
7 Check (= 1) so that the XCmd_Stop has priority and is accepted at any time. If the Command Source is
not External, the motor or drive requires a reset.
Clear this checkbox (= 0) so that the XCmd_Stop only works when the command source is External.
8 Check (= 1) to let local circuits start/stop the drive without an alarm.
Clear this checkbox (= 0) to start/stop the drive from the HMI or program only.
9 Check to have program settings, such as Speed Reference, track operator settings in Operator command
source, and have operator settings track Program Settings in Program command source.
10 Check to have the Program and Operator Speed Reference track the Override Speed Reference in
Override command source or the actual speed in Hand command source.

294 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

1
2
3

4
5

Table 210 - Engineering Page 3 Description

Item Description
1 Check to stop the drive if an I/O Fault is detected. After the I/O Fault clears, a reset is required before the
drive can be started.
Clear this checkbox to show only the I/O Fault Status/Alarm and not stop the drive if an I/O Fault is
detected.
2 Check to stop the drive on a failure to start. A reset is required before another start can be attempted.
Clear this checkbox to show only the Fail to Start status and alarm on a failure to start. The outputs are
not changed, so the instruction continues to attempt to start the motor.
3 The drive always stops on an Interlock trip. This item cannot be cleared. It is displayed as a reminder
that the Interlock Trip function always stops the drive.
4 Check to keep control of the drive Speed Reference with the Operator, Program, External, or Follow the
Source even if the instruction is in Program command source.
Clear this checkbox to have control of the drive Speed Reference follow the Instruction command
source.
5 Check to keep control of the drive Start and Stop commands with the Operator, Program, External, or
Follow the Source, even if the instruction is in Operator command source.
IMPORTANT: The Program cannot Jog the drive, even if Jogging is enabled.
Clear this checkbox to have control of the drive Start, Stop, and Jog follow Instruction command source.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 295

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Table 211 - Engineering Tab Page 4 Description

Item Description
1 Type the time (in seconds) the audible alarm sounds on a commanded start.
2 Type the time, in seconds, to ramp speed feedback when in Simulation.

296 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

HMI Configuration Tab

The HMI configuration tab provides access to displayed text, and faceplate-to-
faceplate navigation settings. Configure the description, label, tag, and security
area for the device. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for the
description of the common attributes.

7
1
2

3
4
5

Table 212 - HMI Configuration Description

Item Description
1 Check if a run forward permissive object is used with this motor. This check changes the Permissive
indicator to a clickable button to open the Permissive faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Permissive object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_Perm’. For example, if your P_Motor object has the name ’Motor123’, then its Permissive
object must be named ‘Motor123_Perm’.
2 Check if a run reverse Permissive object is used with this motor. This check changes the Permissive
indicator to a clickable button to open the Permissive faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Permissive object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_Perm’. For example, if your P_Motor object has the name ’Motor123’, then its Permissive
object must be named ‘Motor123_Perm’.

3 Check if an Interlock object is used with this motor. This check changes the Interlock indicator to a
clickable button to open the Interlock faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Interlock object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_Intlk’. For example, if your P_Motor object has the name’Motor123’, then its Interlock
object must be named ‘Motor123_Intlk’.

4 Check if a Restart Inhibit object is used with this motor. This check makes the Restart Inhibit button
visible.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Restart Inhibit object in the controller must be the name of the object
with the suffix ‘_ResInh’. For example, if your P_Motor object has the name ’Motor123’, then its Restart
Inhibit object must be named ‘Motor123_ResInh’.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 297

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Table 212 - HMI Configuration Description

Item Description
5 Check if a Run Time object is used with this motor. This check makes the Run Time button visible.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Run Time object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_RunTime’. For example, if your P_Motor object has the name ‘Motor123’, then its Run Time
object must be named ‘Motor123_RunTime’.
6 Type the text to display when the motor is running forward.
7 Type the number of decimal places to be shown for actual speed.

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications that are helpful to diagnose or help
prevent device problems. The device problems can include specific reasons a
device is 'Not Ready', device warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and
predictive/preventive maintenance data.

The Diagnostics tab displays possible reasons for the device not being ready.
See Diagnostics Tab on page 28

Alarms Tab

The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the
alarms page changes color to show the current active alarm status. A blinking
alarm icon indicates that one or more alarms must be acknowledged or the
device must be reset. See Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm) on page 51 for
more information.

Trends Tab
The Trends tab shows trend charts of key device data over time. These faceplate
trends provide a quick view of current device performance to supplement, but
not replace, dedicated historical or live trend displays. The trends displays are
common across all Motors Family Add-On Instructions. See Common Trends
Tab - Motors on page 219

298 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

PowerFlex 755 Drive The P_PF755 (PowerFlex 755 drive) object is used to operate one
variable-speed motor by using a PowerFlex 755 AC variable frequency drive
(P_PF755) in various command sources and monitoring for fault conditions.

Display Elements (P_PF755)

A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced

multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix system, aid consistency and save engineering time.

The P_PF753 instruction uses the same HMI display elements that are used
for the Variable Speed Drive (P_VSD) instruction. See Display Elements
(P_VSD) on page 264

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator command source. Several features are common to all Add-On
Instructions faceplates for the motors family. See Common Operator Tab -
Motors on page 217.

Table 213 - Operator Tab Description

Item Description
1 Current speed of drive
2 Setpoint for the speed of the drive

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 299

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Maintenance Tab
Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance
tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot, temporarily work around device
problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance. Several features are
common to all Add-On Instructions faceplates for the motors family.
See Common Maintenance Tab - Motors on page 218

1
2

Table 214 - Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type the clamping limits for the speed setpoint. If a speed setpoint outside this range is entered, the
speed is clamped at these limits and Sts_SpeedLimited is asserted.
2 Drive maintenance data.

300 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Advanced Properties Display

The Advanced Properties Display opens to the advanced maintenance settings.

The Advanced Properties Display provides access to device configuration
parameters and ranges, and options for device and I/O setup. This tab is used
for initial system commissioning or later system changes.

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Table 215 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type the amount of time to hold Out_Reset true to reset a drive fault when a reset command is
received.
2 Type the amount of time to allow for the run feedback of the drive to confirm that the drive has started
before raising a Fail to Start alarm.
3 Type the amount of time to allow for the run feedback of the drive to confirm that the drive has stopped
before raising a Fail to Stop alarm.
4 Type the maximum time (in seconds) that the drive can be jogged by using OCmd_Jog.

IMPORTANT: This value stops drive jogging if HMI communication is lost during a jog.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 301

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Engineering Tab

The Engineering Tab consists of three pages.

1 8
2 9
10

3
4
5

6
7

Table 216 - Engineering Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Type the engineering unit value for the maximum speed feedback from the drive.
2 Type the engineering unit value for the minimum speed feedback from the drive. (This value is usually
zero. Do not enter a negative value for reversing drives. Reversing is handled separately.)
3 Check to permit the Operator Start or Stop command to reset any previous faults (I/O Fault, Fail to Start,
Fail to Stop, Interlock Trip), then start or stop the motor.

Clear this checkbox if a reset is required to clear faults.

4 Check to permit the External Start or Stop command to reset any previous faults (I/O Fault, Fail to Start,
Fail to Stop, Interlock Trip), then start or stop the motor.

Clear this checkbox if a reset is required to clear faults.

5 Check to enable Jog on the Operator tab so that the drive can be jogged from the faceplate.
6 Check to enable Forward and Reverse directions on the Operator tab so that the drive can be
commanded to run forward or reverse.
7 Check to have the bypassable interlocks and permissives bypassed in Override command source.
8 Type the engineering unit value for the maximum speed reference sent to the drive.
9 Type the engineering unit value for the minimum speed reference sent to the drive. (This value is
usually zero. Do not enter a negative value for reversing drives. Reversing is handled separately.)
10 Type the text of the units of measure Engineering Units of the scaled speed feedback. (Units of measure
are often 'Hz', 'RPM' or 'Percent’.)

302 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

1
2
3

4
5

7
8

Table 217 - Engineering Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Check (= 1) so that the OCmd_Stop has priority and is accepted at any time.
Clear this checkbox (= 0) so that the OCmd_Stop works only in Operator or Maintenance command
source.
2 Check (= 1) so that the XCmd_Stop has priority and is accepted at any time. If the Command Source is
not External, the motor or drive requires a reset.
Clear this checkbox (= 0) so that the XCmd_Stop only works when the command source is External.
3 Check (= 1) to allow local start/stop without an alarm.
Clear this checkbox (= 0) to
start/stop from the HMI or program only.
4 Check to have program settings, such as Speed Reference, track operator settings in Operator command
source, and have operator settings track Program Settings in Program command source.
5 Check to have the Program and Operator Speed Reference track the Override Speed Reference in
Override command source or the actual speed in Hand command source.
6 Check to stop the drive if an I/O Fault is detected.
Clear the checkbox to show only the I/O Fault Status/Alarm and not stop the drive if an I/O Fault is
detected.
7 Check so that if a motor fail to start is detected, the motor is stopped. A reset is required before another
start can be attempted.

Clear the checkbox and if a motor fail to start is detected, the instruction sets only the Sts_FailToStart
status (and the Alm_FailToStart alarm, if so configured). The outputs are not changed, so the
instruction continues to start the motor.
8 The motor always stops on an interlock trip. This item cannot be unchecked. It is displayed as a
reminder that the Interlock Trip function always trips the motor.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 303

Chapter 5 Motors Family

1
2

3
4

Table 218 - Engineering Tab Page 3 Description

Item Description
1 Check to keep control of the drive Speed Reference with the Operator, Program, External, or Follow the
Source even if the instruction is in Program command source.
2 Check to keep control of the drive Start, Stop, and Jog commands with the Operator, Program, External,
or Follow the Source, even if the instruction is in Operator command source.
IMPORTANT: The Program cannot Jog the drive, even if Jogging is enabled.
3 Type the time (in seconds) the audible alarm sounds on a commanded start.
4 Enter the time, in seconds, to ramp speed feedback when in Simulation.

304 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

HMI Configuration Tab

6
7

8
1
2

3
4
5

Table 219 - HMI Configuration Tab Description

Item Description
1 Check if a run forward permissive object is used with this motor. This check changes the Permissive
indicator to a clickable button to open the Permissive faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Permissive object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_Perm’. For example, if your P_Motor object has the name ’Motor123’, then its Permissive
object must be named ‘Motor123_Perm’.
2 Check if a run reverse Permissive object is used with this motor. This check changes the Permissive
indicator to a clickable button to open the Permissive faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Permissive object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_Perm’. For example, if your P_Motor object has the name ’Motor123’, then its Permissive
object must be named ‘Motor123_Perm’.
3 Check if an Interlock object is used with this motor. This check changes the Interlock indicator to a
clickable button to open the Interlock faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Interlock object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_Intlk’. For example, if your P_Motor object has the name’Motor123’, then its Interlock
object must be named ‘Motor123_Intlk’.
4 Check if a Restart Inhibit object is used with this motor. This check makes the Restart Inhibit button
visible.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Restart Inhibit object in the controller must be the name of the object
with the suffix ‘_ResInh’. For example, if your P_Motor object has the name ’Motor123’, then its Restart
Inhibit object must be named ‘Motor123_ResInh’.
5 Check if a Run Time object is used with this motor. This check makes the Run Time button visible.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Run Time object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_RunTime’. For example, if your P_Motor object has the name ‘Motor123’, then its Run Time
object must be named ‘Motor123_RunTime’.
6 Type a name for forward direction.
7 Type a name for reverse direction.
8 Type the number of decimal places to be shown for actual speed.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 305

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications that are helpful to diagnose or help
prevent device problems. The device problems can include specific reasons a
device is 'Not Ready', device warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and
predictive/preventive maintenance data.

The Diagnostics tab displays possible reasons for the device not being ready.
See Diagnostics Tab on page 28

Alarms Tab

The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the
alarms page changes color to show the current active alarm status. A blinking
alarm icon indicates that one or more alarms must be acknowledged or the
device must be reset. See Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm) on page 51 for
more information.

Trends Tab

The Trends tab shows trend charts of key device data over time. These faceplate
trends provide a quick view of current device performance to supplement, but
not replace, dedicated historical or live trend displays. The trends displays are
common across all Motors Family Add-On Instructions. See Common Trends
Tab - Motors on page 219

306 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

SMC™-50 Smart Motor The P_SMC50 (SMC-50 Smart Motor Controller) Add-On Instruction
controls and monitors a motor via an SMC-50 Smart Starter.
Controller (P_SMC50)

Display Elements (P_SMC50)

A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced

multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix system, aid consistency and save engineering time.
Table 220 - P_SMC50 Display Elements
Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_P_SMC_R Motors operate in the right, up, and
down positions.
GO_P_SMC_U

GO_P_SMC_D

GO_P_SMC_Blower_R Blowers operate in the right, left, up,

and down positions.
GO_P_SMC_Blower_L

GO_P_SMC_Blower_U

GO_P_SMC_Blower_D

GO_P_SMC_Conveyer_U Conveyor in the up position is shown

as a display element.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 307

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Table 220 - P_SMC50 Display Elements

Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_P_SMC_Inline_U Inline motors operate the up, right,
left, and down positions.
GO_P_SMC_Inline_R

GO_P_SMC_Inline_L

GO_P_SMC_Inline_D

GO_P_SMC_Pump_R Pumps operate in the right, left, and

up positions.
GO_P_SMC_Pump_L

GO_P_SMC_Pump_U

GO_P_SMC_Agitator_D Agitator in the down position shown

as a display element.

GO_P_SMC_Mixer_U Mixer in the up position shown as a

display element.

GO_P_SMC_RPump_U Rotary gear pump in the up position

shown as a display element.

GO_P_SMC_Fan_D Fan in the down position shown as a

display element.

308 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator command source. Several features are common to all Add-On
Instructions faceplates for the motors family. See Common Operator Tab -
Motors on page 217.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 309

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot, temporarily work around device
problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance. Several features are
common to all Add-On Instructions faceplates for the motors family.
See Common Maintenance Tab - Motors on page 218

310 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Advanced Properties Display

The Advanced Properties Display opens to the advanced maintenance settings.

The Advanced Properties Display provides access to device configuration
parameters and ranges, and options for device and I/O setup. This tab is used
for initial system commissioning or later system changes.

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Table 221 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type the amount of time to hold Out_Reset true to reset a drive fault when a reset command is
received.
2 Type the amount of time for the run feedback of the drive to confirm that the drive has started before
raising a Fail to Start alarm.
3 Type the amount of time for the run feedback of the drive to confirm that the drive has stopped before
raising a Fail to Stop alarm.
4 Type the maximum amount of time allowed to jog the motor.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 311

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Engineering Tab

1
2

3
4

5
6

Table 222 - Engineering Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Check to reset faults on a new Operator command.
Clear this checkbox if a reset is required to clear faults.
2 Check to reset faults on a new External command.
Clear this checkbox if a reset is required to clear faults.
3 Check to make the Jog command button visible on the Operator tab and enable the drive to be jogged
from the faceplate
4 Check to have the interlocks and permissives that can be bypassed, bypassed in Override command
source.
5 Check (= 1) so that the OCmd_Stop has priority and is accepted at any time. If the Command Source is
not Operator or Maintenance, the motor or drive requires a reset.
Clear this checkbox (= 0) so that the OCmd_Stop works only in Operator or Maintenance command
source.
6 Check (= 1) so that the XCmd_Stop has priority and is accepted at any time. If the Command Source is
not External, the motor or drive requires a reset.
Clear this checkbox (= 0) so that the XCmd_Stop only works when the command source is External.
7 Check (= 1) to let local circuits start/stop the drive without an alarm.
Clear this checkbox (= 0) to start/stop the drive from the HMI or program only.

312 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

1
2
3

Table 223 - Engineering Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Check to stop the drive if an I/O Fault is detected. After the I/O Fault clears, a reset is required before the
drive can be started.
Clear this checkbox to show only the I/O Fault Status/Alarm and not stop the drive if an I/O Fault is
detected.
2 Check to stop the drive on a failure to start. A reset is required before another start can be attempted.
Clear this checkbox to show only the Fail to Start status and alarm on a failure to start. The outputs are
not changed, so the instruction continues to attempt to start the motor.
3 The drive always stops on an Interlock trip. This item cannot be cleared. It is displayed as a reminder
that the Interlock Trip function always stops the drive.
4 Type the time (in seconds) the audible alarm sounds on a commanded start.
5 Type the time, in seconds, to ramp speed feedback when in Simulation.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 313

Chapter 5 Motors Family

HMI Configuration Tab

The HMI configuration tab provides access to displayed text, and faceplate-to-
faceplate navigation settings. Configure the description, label, tag, and security
area for the device. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for the
description of the common attributes.

1
2
3

Table 224 - HMI Configuration Tab Description

Item Description
1 Check if a Permissive object is used with this motor. This check changes the Permissive indicator to a
clickable button to open the Permissive faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Permissive object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_Perm’. For example, if your P_SMC50 object has the name ’Motor123’, then its Permissive
object must be named ‘Motor123_Perm’.
2 Check if an Interlock object is used with this motor. This check changes the Interlock indicator to a
clickable button to open the Interlock faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Interlock object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_Intlk’. For example, if your P_SMC50 object has the name’Motor123’, then its Interlock
object must be named ‘Motor123_Intlk’.
3 Check if a Restart Inhibit object is used with this motor. This check makes the Restart Inhibit button
visible.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Restart Inhibit object in the controller must be the name of the object
with the suffix ‘_ResInh’. For example, if your P_SMC50 object has the name ’Motor123’, then its
Restart Inhibit object must be named ‘Motor123_ResInh’.
4 Check if a Run Time object is used with this motor. This check makes the Run Time button visible.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Run Time object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_RunTime’. For example, if your P_SMC50 object has the name ‘Motor123’, then its Run Time
object must be named ‘Motor123_RunTime’.

314 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications that are helpful to diagnose or help
prevent device problems. The device problems can include specific reasons a
device is 'Not Ready', device warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and
predictive/preventive maintenance data.

The Diagnostics tab displays possible reasons for the device not being ready.
See Diagnostics Tab on page 28

Alarms Tab

The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the
alarms page changes color to show the current active alarm status. A blinking
alarm icon indicates that one or more alarms must be acknowledged or the
device must be reset. See Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm) on page 51 for
more information.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 315

Chapter 5 Motors Family

SMC Flex Smart Motor This instruction controls and monitors a motor via an SMC Flex Smart Starter.
Controller (P_SMCFlex)
Display Elements
A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced
multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix system, aid consistency and save engineering time.

The P_SMCFlex instruction uses the same HMI display elements that are used
for the SMC-50 Smart Motor Controller (P_SMC50) instruction.
See Display Elements (P_SMC50) on page 307

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator command source. Several features are common to all Add-On
Instructions faceplates for the motors family. See Common Operator Tab -
Motors on page 217.

The operator tab for the P_SMCFlex instruction also shows the average full
load amps and the motor thermal usage.

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot, temporarily work around device

316 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance. Several features are
common to all Add-On Instructions faceplates for the motors family.
See Common Maintenance Tab - Motors on page 218

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 317

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Advanced Properties Display

The Advanced Properties Display opens to the advanced maintenance settings.

The Advanced Properties Display provides access to device configuration
parameters and ranges, and options for device and I/O setup. This tab is used
for initial system commissioning or later system changes.

Advanced Maintenance Tab

2
3
4

Table 225 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type the number of seconds the starter fault reset is pulsed to clear motor fault.
2 Type the time, in seconds to allow run feedback to show that the motor has started before raising a fail
to start alarm.
3 Type the time, in seconds to allow run feedback to show that the motor has stopped before raising a fail
to stop alarm.
4 Type the time, in seconds for the maximum amount of time to jog the motor.

318 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Engineering Tab

1
2

3
4
5
6
7

Table 226 - Engineering Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Check to reset faults on a new Operator command.
Clear this checkbox for ‘reset required’ to clear fault.
2 Check to reset faults on a new External command.
Clear this checkbox for ‘reset required’ to clear fault.
3 Check to make the Jog command button visible on the Operator tab and enable the drive to be jogged
from the faceplate.
4 Check to have the interlocks and permissives that can be bypassed, bypassed in Override command
source.
5 Check (= 1) so that the OCmd_Stop has priority and is accepted at any time. If the Command Source is
not Operator or Maintenance, the motor or drive requires a reset.
Clear this checkbox (= 0) so that the OCmd_Stop works only in Operator or Maintenance command
source.
6 Check (= 1) so that the XCmd_Stop has priority and is accepted at any time. If the Command Source is
not External, the motor or drive requires a reset.
Clear this checkbox (= 0) so that the XCmd_Stop only works when the command source is External.
7 Check to allow local Start/Stop without alarm.
Clear this checkbox to allow start/stop by using only Program or Operator commands or Override Logic.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 319

Chapter 5 Motors Family

1
2
3

Table 227 - Engineering Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Check to stop the drive if an I/O Fault is detected. After the I/O Fault clears, a reset is required before the
drive can be started.
Clear this checkbox to show only the I/O Fault Status/Alarm and not stop the drive if an I/O Fault is
detected.
2 Check to stop the drive on a failure to start. A reset is required before another start can be attempted.
Clear this checkbox to show only the Fail to Start status and alarm on a failure to start. The outputs are
not changed, so the instruction continues to attempt to start the motor.
3 The drive always stops on an Interlock trip. This item cannot be cleared. It is displayed as a reminder
that the Interlock Trip function always stops the drive.
4 Type the time (in seconds) the audible alarm sounds on a commanded start.
5 Set the time delay (in seconds) for running or stopped status to be echoed back when the simulation is
enabled or when run feedback is not used.

320 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

HMI Configuration Tab

The HMI configuration tab provides access to displayed text, and faceplate-to-
faceplate navigation settings. Configure the description, label, tag, and security
area for the device. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for the
description of the common attributes.

2
3
4

Table 228 - HMI Configuration Tab Description

Item Description
1 Check if a Permissive object is used with this motor. This check changes the Permissive indicator to a
clickable button to open the Permissive faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Permissive object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_Perm’. For example, if your P_SMCFlex object has the name ’Motor123’, then its Permissive
object must be named ‘Motor123_Perm’.
2 Check if an Interlock object is used with this motor. This check changes the Interlock indicator to a
clickable button to open the Interlock faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Interlock object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_Intlk’. For example, if your P_SMCFlex object has the name’Motor123’, then its Interlock
object must be named ‘Motor123_Intlk’.
3 Check if a Restart Inhibit object is used with this motor. This check makes the Restart Inhibit button
visible.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Restart Inhibit object in the controller must be the name of the object
with the suffix ‘_ResInh’. For example, if your P_SMCFlex object has the name ’Motor123’, then its
Restart Inhibit object must be named ‘Motor123_ResInh’.
4 Check if a Run Time object is used with this motor. This check makes the Run Time button visible.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Run Time object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_RunTime’. For example, if your P_SMCFlex object has the name ‘Motor123’, then its Run
Time object must be named ‘Motor123_RunTime’.
5 Select the units, megawatts, or kilowatts, to be used for power.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 321

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications that are helpful to diagnose or help
prevent device problems. The device problems can include specific reasons a
device is 'Not Ready', device warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and
predictive/preventive maintenance data.

The Diagnostics tab displays possible reasons for the device not being ready.
See Diagnostics Tab on page 28

Alarms Tab

The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the
alarms page changes color to show the current active alarm status. A blinking
alarm icon indicates that one or more alarms must be acknowledged or the
device must be reset. See Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm) on page 51 for
more information.

322 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

E1 Plus™ Electronic Overload The P_E1PlusE (E1 Plus Electronic Overload Relay (EtherNet/IP)) Add-On
Instruction controls and monitors an E1 Plus Electronic Overload Relay by
Relay (EtherNet/IP) using the 193-ETN EtherNet/IP interface module.
(P_E1PlusE)
Display Elements (EtherNet/IP) (P_E1PlusE)

A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced

multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix system, aid consistency and save engineering time.

Table 229 - P_E1PlusE Display Element Description

Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_P_Ovld Standard E1 Plus Electronic Overload
GO_P_Ovld1 Relay (EtherNet/IP) global objects.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 323

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator command source. Several features are common to all Add-On
Instructions faceplates for the motors family. See Common Operator Tab -
Motors on page 217.

1
3

Table 230 - Operator Tab Description

Item Description
1 Full load amps numeric display and sparkline
2 Thermal utilization
3 Input indicator
4 Output indicator

324 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot, temporarily work around device
problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance. Several features are
common to all Add-On Instructions faceplates for the motors family.

See Common Maintenance Tab - Motors on page 218

Table 231 - Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Trip log

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 325

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Advanced Properties Display

The Advanced Properties Display opens to the advanced maintenance settings.

The Advanced Properties Display provides access to device configuration
parameters and ranges, and options for device and I/O setup. This tab is used
for initial system commissioning or later system changes.

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Table 232 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type the number of seconds (0…2,147,483) to pulse.

326 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Engineering Tab

Table 233 - Engineering Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type the number of seconds (0…2,147,483) to pulse.
2 Type the maximum number of resets (1…3) in a given number of seconds (0…2,147,483).
IMPORTANT: Setting the time to approximately10 seconds or less allows unlimited Remote Trip resets

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 327

Chapter 5 Motors Family

HMI Configuration Tab

The HMI configuration tab provides access to displayed text, and faceplate-to-
faceplate navigation settings. Configure the description, label, tag, and security
area for the device. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for the
description of the common attributes.

1
2
3

Table 234 - HMI Configuration Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type the names for input 1
2 Type the names for input 2
3 Type the names for output A.

328 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications that are helpful to diagnose or help
prevent device problems. The device problems can include specific reasons a
device is 'Not Ready', device warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and
predictive/preventive maintenance data.

The Diagnostics tab displays possible reasons for the device not being ready.
See Diagnostics Tab on page 28

Alarms Tab

The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the
alarms page changes color to show the current active alarm status. A blinking
alarm icon indicates that one or more alarms must be acknowledged or the
device must be reset. See Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm) on page 51 for
more information.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 329

Chapter 5 Motors Family

E3/E3 Plus Overload Relay The P_E3Ovld Add-On Instruction controls and monitors a 193/592-EC1, -
EC2, -EC3, or -EC5 overload relay.
(P_E3Ovld)

Display Elements

A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced

multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix system, aid consistency and save engineering time.

The P_E3Ovld instruction uses the same HMI display elements that are used
for the E1 Plus Overload Relay (EtherNet/IP) (P_E1PlusE) instruction.
See Display Elements (EtherNet/IP) (P_E1PlusE) on page 323

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator command source. Several features are common to all Add-On
Instructions faceplates for the motors family.

Table 235 - Operator Tab Description

Item Description
1 Overload status indicator.
2 Outputs (up to 2).
3 Inputs (up to 4).

330 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot, temporarily work around device
problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance. Several features are
common to all Add-On Instructions faceplates for the motors family.
See Common Maintenance Tab - Motors on page 218

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 331

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Advanced Properties Display

The Advanced Properties Display opens to the advanced maintenance settings.

The Advanced Properties Display provides access to device configuration
parameters and ranges, and options for device and I/O setup. This tab is used
for initial system commissioning or later system changes.

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Table 236 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type the number of seconds (0…2,147,483) to pulse.

332 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Engineering Tab

Table 237 - Engineering Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type the maximum number of resets (1…3) in a given number of seconds (0…2,147,483).
IMPORTANT: Setting the time to approximately10 seconds or less allows unlimited Remote Trip resets
2 Check to let the Maintenance and/or Operator User use the Remote Trip function.
3 Check to let the Maintenance and/or Operator User use the Trip Reset function.
4 Click to select the type of E3 Overload used.
IMPORTANT: E3 Plus has two additional inputs and one additional output.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 333

Chapter 5 Motors Family

HMI Configuration Tab

The HMI configuration tab provides access to displayed text, and faceplate-to-
faceplate navigation settings. Configure the description, label, tag, and security
area for the device. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for the
description of the common attributes.

1
2

Table 238 - HMI Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type the names for input 1
2 Type the names for input 2
3 Type the names for output A.

334 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications that are helpful to diagnose or help
prevent device problems. The device problems can include specific reasons a
device is 'Not Ready', device warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and
predictive/preventive maintenance data.

The Diagnostics tab displays possible reasons for the device not being ready.
See Diagnostics Tab on page 28

Alarms Tab

The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the
alarms page changes color to show the current active alarm status. A blinking
alarm icon indicates that one or more alarms must be acknowledged or the
device must be reset. See Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm) on page 51 for
more information.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 335

Chapter 5 Motors Family

E300™ Electronic Overload The P_E300Ovld (E300 Electronic Overload Relay) Add-On Instruction
controls and monitors a 193-ECM-ETR (E300 on EtherNet/IP) overload
Relay (EtherNet/IP) relay.
(P_E300Ovld)
Display Elements

A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced

multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix system, aid consistency and save engineering time.

The (EtherNet/IP) (P_E300Ovld) instruction uses the same HMI display

elements that are used for the E1 Plus Overload Relay (EtherNet/IP)
(P_E1PlusE) instruction. See Display Elements (EtherNet/IP) (P_E1PlusE)
on page 323

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator command source. Several features are common to all Add-On
Instructions faceplates for the motors family. See Common Operator Tab -
Motors on page 217.

2
1
3

Table 239 - Operator Tab Description

Item Description
1 Overload status indicator.
2 Thermal utilization.
3 Motor current indicator.

336 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot, temporarily work around device
problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance. Several features are
common to all Add-On Instructions faceplates for the motors family.
See Common Maintenance Tab - Motors on page 218

3
4

Table 240 - Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Average current.
2 Current imbalance.
3 Control module status.
4 Sensing module status.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 337

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Advanced Properties Display

The Advanced Properties Display opens to the advanced maintenance settings.

The Advanced Properties Display provides access to device configuration
parameters and ranges, and options for device and I/O setup. This tab is used
for initial system commissioning or later system changes.

Advanced Maintenance Tab

1 5

6
2 7
3

Table 241 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 L3-L1 phase voltage.
2 L1 current.
3 Current to ground.
4 L3 current.
5 L3-L2 phase voltage.
6 L2-L1 phase voltage.
7 L2 current.
8 Type the number of seconds (0…2,147,483) to pulse.

338 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Table 242 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Up to six inputs.
2 Up to three outputs.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 339

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Table 243 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Page 3 Description

Item Description
1 Status of up to four digital I/O modules. Indicators for up to four discrete inputs and up to two discrete
outputs.
2 Status of up to four analog input modules. Indicators for the three analog inputs.

340 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Table 244 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Page 4 Description

Item Description
1 Indicators for the DeviceLogix™ output status.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 341

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Engineering Tab

Table 245 - Engineering Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type the maximum number of resets (1…3) in a given number of seconds (0…2,147,483).
IMPORTANT: Set the time to approximately 10 seconds or less to allow unlimited Remote Trip resets.
2 Check to let the Maintenance and/or Operator User use the Remote Trip function.
3 Check to let the Maintenance and/or Operator User use the Trip Reset function.

342 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

HMI Configuration Tab

The HMI configuration tab provides access to displayed text, and faceplate-to-
faceplate navigation settings. Configure the description, label, tag, and security
area for the device. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for the
description of the common attributes.

Table 246 - HMI Configuration Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type the names for inputs Pt00…Pt05.
2 Type the names for outputs 1 and 2.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 343

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications that are helpful to diagnose or help
prevent device problems. The device problems can include specific reasons a
device is 'Not Ready', device warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and
predictive/preventive maintenance data.

The Diagnostics tab displays possible reasons for the device not being ready.
See Diagnostics Tab on page 28

Alarms Tab

The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the
alarms page changes color to show the current active alarm status. A blinking
alarm icon indicates that one or more alarms must be acknowledged or the
device must be reset. See Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm) on page 51 for
more information.

344 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Run Time and Start Counter The P_RunTime (Run Time and Start Counter) Add-On Instruction is used
to accumulate the total run time and count of starts for a motor or other
(P_RunTime) equipment. It is a software implementation of the mechanical hour meter that
is often mounted in the door of a Motor Control Center (MCC) cabinet to
show total motor run time. The run time and number of starts are variables
used by maintenance personnel to determine when to perform maintenance
activities on the motor or other equipment.

Display Elements
A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced
multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix system, aid consistency and save engineering time.

Table 247 - P_RunTime Display Element

Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_P_RunTime Standard Run Time Global Object.

The graphic symbol in the preceding table is for use on faceplates and end-user
process graphic displays.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 345

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status.

The following table lists the functions on the Operator tab.

Table 248 - P_RunTime Operator Tab Description
Item Description
1 Click to clear maximum continuous running time for any given start.
2 Click to clear total running time.
3 Click to clear total number of motor starts or start attempts.

Advanced Properties Display

HMI Configuration Tab

The HMI configuration tab provides access to displayed text, and

faceplate-to-faceplate navigation settings. Configure the description, label, tag,
and security area for the device. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for
the description of the common attributes.

346 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Restart Inhibit for Large The P_ResInh (Restart Inhibit for Large Motor) Add-On Instruction is used
to help prevent damage to a large motor through repeated starts. The high
Motor (P_ResInh) starting current for a large motor causes considerable heating. The thermal
mass of a large motor is much smaller relative to its horsepower and starting
current compared to smaller motors. For this reason, repeated starts (or start
attempts) over a short time overheats the motor windings, potentially
damaging the motor permanently.

The P_ResInh instruction provides a rule-based state model for restarts and is
not intended to model or monitor the motor heating. It cannot replace sensor-
based motor monitoring devices. It can, however, be a simple solution to avoid
over stressing a motor without the cost (money or controller resources) of more
extensive modeling and monitoring.

Display Elements
A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced
multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix system, aid consistency and save engineering time.
Table 249 - P_ResInh Display Elements Description
Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_P_ResInh Standard Restart Inhibit Global Object.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 347

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status.

The Operator tab shows the following information:

• A graphical representation of the P_ResInh instruction State Diagram.
• Indication of the current state.
• The status appears at the top and displays either Ready to Start or Time
Until Ready with an animated countdown timer.

7
2

3 5 6

Table 250 - Operator Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type the time, in hours, during which three motor starts turn a cold motor to hot.
2 Type the time, in hours, to wait after failing to start a cold motor the first time.
3 Type the time, in hours, to wait after failing to start a cold motor two or more times.
4 Type the time, in hours, for a stopped hot motor to cool.
5 Type the time, in hours, to wait after failing to start a hot motor the first time.
6 Type the time, in hours, to wait after stopping a running hot motor.
7 Type the time, in hours, to wait after failing to start a hot motor two or more times.

348 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Motors Family Chapter 5

Advanced Properties Display

HMI Configuration Tab

The HMI configuration tab provides access to displayed text, and

faceplate-to-faceplate navigation settings. Configure the description, label, tag,
and security area for the device. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for
the description of the common attributes.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 349

Chapter 5 Motors Family

Notes:

350 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Chapter 6

Valves Family

The Process Objects in this group provide an interface to a wide range of

process valve types and valve statistical calculations.

Common Valves Faceplates Faceplate attributes are common to several Add-On Instructions in the valves
family. Attributes specific to a valve are detailed in the individual sections. If a
functionality is not enabled, the buttons are not visible. Common attributes
for valves are detailed in this section. Basic attributes are described in the
overview. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25

Common Operator Tab - Valves

2
3

Table 251 - Common Operator Tab Attributes

Item Description
1 Valve state indicator.
2 Click to open valve.
3 Click to close valve.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 351

Chapter 6 Valves Family

Common Maintenance Tab - Valves

Table 252 - Common Maintenance Tab Attributes

Item Description
1 Click yes to bypass checking of interlocks and permissives that can be bypassed.
2 Click to open Valve Statistics faceplate. See 2-state Valve Statistics (P_ValveStats) on page 396

352 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Valves Family Chapter 6

Analog/Pulsed Control Valve The P_ValveC (Analog/Pulsed Control Valve) Add-On Instruction
manipulates a control valve by using an analog signal or discrete signals, and
(P_ValveC) monitors the valve by using an analog position feedback.

Display Elements

A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced

multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix® system, aid consistency and save engineering time.
Table 253 - P_ValveC Display Elements Description
Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_ProcessControlValve Normal controlled valve symbol for
horizontal pipe.

GO_ProcessControlValve1 Inverted controlled valve symbol for

horizontal pipe.

GO_ProcessControlValve2 Controlled valve symbol for vertical

pipe (pipe to the left).

GO_ProcessControlValve3 Controlled valve symbol for vertical

pipe (pipe to the right).

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 353

Chapter 6 Valves Family

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator command source. Several features are common to all Add-On
Instructions faceplates for the valves family. See Common Valves Faceplates on
page 351.

1
2

Table 254 - Operator Tab Description

Item Description
1 Controlled Variable bar graph
2 Click to enter the Controlled Variable value.
3 Current Controlled Variable.

354 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Valves Family Chapter 6

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot, temporarily work around device
problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance. Several features are
common to all Add-On Instructions faceplates for the valves family.
See Common Valves Faceplates on page 351.

1
2

Table 255 - Maintenance Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Check to enable the Valve Closed limit switch for failure checking.
2 Check to enable the Valve Open limit switch for failure checking.
3 Type a value to indicate the position, that if exceeded, the valve is assumed open if limit switches are
not used.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 355

Chapter 6 Valves Family

1
2

Table 256 - Maintenance Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Maximum rate of increase (% Open/sec) for the CV rate of change limit. A value of zero indicates
unlimited.
2 Maximum rate of decrease (% Open/sec) for the CV rate of change limit. A value of zero indicates
unlimited.

356 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Valves Family Chapter 6

Advanced Properties Display

The Advanced Properties Display opens to the advanced maintenance settings.

The Advanced Properties Display provides access to device configuration
parameters and ranges, and options for device and I/O setup. This tab is used
for initial system commissioning or later system changes.

Advanced Maintenance Tab

1 3

Table 257 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Type the clamping limits for the Controlled Variable in engineering units.
Clamping limits are enforced in Operator and Program command sources only.
2 Type the CV Rate of Change Limit in engineering units per second. This value determines the rate at
which the CV output changes upon a change in CV target. A value of zero disables rate of change
limiting.
3 Type the CV in engineering units.
This entry is available in Operator command source and Maintenance command source. It is available in
other command sources if Bumpless Program/Operator Transition is not selected.
4 When checked, the CV holds at the last good value when an Interlock trips or an I/O Fault occurs.
When cleared, the CV is set to the configured Interlock CV value when an Interlock trips or an I/O Fault
occurs.
5 Type the interlock target CV in engineering units.
This value is used for the CV when interlocked or on an I/O Fault, but only if Hold Last Good Value is not
selected.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 357

Chapter 6 Valves Family

Table 258 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Type a value to indicate the time (in seconds) for an open and close pulse.
2 Type a value to indicate the additional time (in seconds)
on the first pulse after a stop or direction change.
3 Type a value to indicate the maximum pulse output time (in seconds) for opening and closing a value.
4 Type a value to indicate the minimum pulse output time (in seconds) for opening and closing a value.
5 Type a value to indicate the amount of time to bump the valve open or closed when feedback is bad.

358 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Valves Family Chapter 6

Engineering Tab

1 3

2 5

Table 259 - Engineering Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Type a maximum and minimum range for the raw feedback signal.
2 Type a maximum and minimum range for the controlled variable in engineering units (for scaling).
3 Type a maximum and minimum range for the controlled variable in engineering units (for scaling).
4 Type an engineering unit for the controlled variable.
5 Type maximum and minimum range (in raw units) to use for output unscaling to I/O.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 359

Chapter 6 Valves Family

1
2
3

4
5
6
7

Table 260 - Engineering Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Check if the valve provides a closed limit switch signal.
2 Check if the valve provides an open limit switch signal.
3 Click to enable a fault when both limit switches are On, or when both switches are Off.
4 Check so that program settings track operator settings in Operator command source, and operator
settings track program settings in Program command source for bumpless transfer.
5 Check so that program and operator settings of the CV track the output CV when the command source
is Hand or Override.

6 Check so that bypassable interlocks and permissives are bypassed in Override command source.
7 Check to have the CV immediately go to its target value or configured Interlock CV value when an
Interlock trips or the instruction is placed in Maintenance or Override command source.
Clear the checkbox to have the CV always use rate of change limiting (ramping) of the CV output.

360 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Valves Family Chapter 6

1
2

3
4

5
6

Table 261 - Engineering Tab Page 3 Description

Item Description
1 Check to have the CV perform the configured Shed Action (hold or go to the Interlock CV value) when
an I/O Fault occurs. When checked, the Shed Trigger is latched; that is, it is necessary to issue a Reset
command to return to normal operation after the I/O Fault condition clears.
Clear the checkbox to have an I/O Fault not trigger the configured Shed Action. The output continues to
operate normally.
2 The device always performs the shed action on an Interlock Trip.
This item cannot be unchecked. It is displayed as a reminder of the Interlock Trip function.
3 Click to have the output go to its configured Interlock CV value when an Interlock trips or an I/O Fault
occurs (if configured as a shed trigger).
Type a value for the interlock CV value to be used if shed is configured to go to a set value.
4 Click to have the output hold its current value when an Interlock trips or an I/O Fault occurs (if
configured as shed trigger).
5 Type a value to indicate the rate that the valve moves when opening.
6 Type a value to indicate the rate that the valve moves when closing.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 361

Chapter 6 Valves Family

HMI Configuration Tab

The HMI configuration tab provides access to displayed text, and faceplate-to-
faceplate navigation settings. Configure the description, label, tag, and security
area for the device. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for the
description of the common attributes.

3
1

2 4

Table 262 - HMI Configuration Tab Description

Item Description
1 Check if an interlock instruction is used with this output.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Interlock object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_Intlk’. For example, if your P_ValveC object has the name ’ValveC123’, then its Interlock
object must be named ‘ValveC123_Intlk’.
2 Check to permit navigation to the faceplate of the object that is the source of the CV for this object.
3 Type the number of decimal places to be shown for the Control Variable.
4 Type the name of the CV object to navigate to when the CV display on the Home tab is clicked.

362 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Valves Family Chapter 6

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications that are helpful to diagnose or help
prevent device problems. The device problems can include specific reasons a
device is 'Not Ready', device warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and
predictive/preventive maintenance data.

The Diagnostics tab displays possible reasons for the device not being ready.
See Diagnostics Tab on page 28

Alarms Tab

The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the
alarms page changes color to show the current active alarm status. A blinking
alarm icon indicates that one or more alarms must be acknowledged or the
device must be reset. See Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm) on page 51 for
more information.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 363

Chapter 6 Valves Family

Hand-operated Valve The P_ValveHO (Hand-operated Valve) Add-On Instruction monitors a hand
(locally) operated valve and displays its current state. The valve can have any
(P_ValveHO) type of actuator – handwheel, lever, motor, solenoid, pneumatic, hydraulic –
but it is normally operated at the valve. The control system only monitors the
valve via open and closed limit switches. The P_ValveHO instruction cannot
control the valve to both open and closed positions, but provides an optional
Trip output to command the valve to its default (fail) position. If the trip
function is used, the P_ValveHO instruction checks to make sure that the valve
reaches the configured trip position (open or closed) if a trip command is
executed.

Display Elements
A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced
multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix system, aid consistency and save engineering time.

Table 263 - P_ValveHO Display Element Description

Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_P_ValveHO Hand-operated Valves that are
GO_P_ValveHO1 shown in various orientations.
GO_P_ValveHO2
GO_P_ValveHO3

364 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Valves Family Chapter 6

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator command source. Several features are common to all Add-On
Instructions faceplates for the valves family. See Common Valves Faceplates on
page 351.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 365

Chapter 6 Valves Family

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot, temporarily work around device
problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance. Several features are
common to all Add-On Instructions faceplates for the valves family.
See Common Valves Faceplates on page 351.

Table 264 - Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Check to configure the valve to use the closed limit switch.
Clear the checkbox to bypass the closed limit switch temporarily.
2 Click to take the device out of service.

366 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Valves Family Chapter 6

Advanced Properties Display

The Advanced Properties Display opens to the advanced maintenance settings.

The Advanced Properties Display provides access to device configuration
parameters and ranges, and options for device and I/O setup. This tab is used
for initial system commissioning or later system changes.

Advanced Maintenance Tab

1
2

Table 265 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type the amount of time to allow the valve to reach its trip position after a trip command is received
before raising a trip fail alarm.
2 Type the amount of time (in seconds) that the valve is not confirmed open or closed before a Transit
Stall.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 367

Chapter 6 Valves Family

Engineering Tab

The Engineering tab consists of two pages.

2
3

5
6

Table 266 - Engineering Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Check if the valve has a closed limit switch and the switch is wired to Inp_ClosedLS for position
monitoring.
2 Check if the valve has an open limit switch and the switch is wired to Inp_OpenLS for position
monitoring.
3 Click ‘ON’ if both limit switches are OFF when the valve is moving in normal operation.
Click ‘OFF’ if both limit switches are ON when the valve is moving in normal operation.
This selection determines which limit switch combination indicates abnormal operation.
4 Check to allow the operator trip command to reset any previous faults (I/O fault, fail to trip, interlock
trip), then trip the valve.
Clear this checkbox to reset faults with only the reset command.
5 Check if a trip output is connected to the P_ValveHO instruction to trip the valve on an interlock or trip
command. This check makes the trip command button visible on the operator tab.
6 Check if sending the trip output to the valve causes it to open (fail open valve).
Clear this checkbox if sending the Trip output to the valve causes it to close (fail closed valve).

368 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Valves Family Chapter 6

1
2
3

Table 267 - Engineering Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Check to send the trip output to the valve if an I/O Fault is detected.
Clear this checkbox to show only the I/O fault status/alarm and not trip the valve if an I/O fault is
detected.
2 The valve always trips on an interlock trip. This item cannot be unchecked. It is displayed as a reminder
that the interlock trip function always trips the valve.
3 Check to keep sending the trip output to the valve on a trip, even if position feedback does not confirm
the valve reached the trip position.
Clear this checkbox to stop sending the trip output to the valve when the valve trip times out and the
fail to trip status is set.
4 Configure the amount of time the valve status shows ‘tripping’ before showing an opened or closed
status when the valve is tripped and I/O are being simulated (Inp_Sim = 1).

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 369

Chapter 6 Valves Family

HMI Configuration Tab

The HMI configuration tab provides access to displayed text, and faceplate-to-
faceplate navigation settings. Configure the description, label, tag, and security
area for the device. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for the
description of the common attributes.

1
2

Table 268 - HMI Configuration Tab Description

Item Description
1 Check if an interlock object is connected to Inp_Intlk. This check changes the interlock indicator on the
operator tab to a button that opens the interlocks faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Interlock object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_Intlk’. For example, if your P_ValveHO object has the name ’ValveHO123’, then its Interlock
object must be named ‘ValveHO123_Intlk’.
2 Check if a Valve Stats instruction is used with this valve. This check makes the Valve Statistics button
visible; clicking this button opens the valve statistics faceplate for this valve.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Valve Stats object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_ValveStats’. For example, if your P_ValveHO object has the name’ValveHO123’, then its
Valve Stats object must be named ‘ValveHO123_ValveStats’

370 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Valves Family Chapter 6

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications that are helpful to diagnose or help
prevent device problems. The device problems can include specific reasons a
device is 'Not Ready', device warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and
predictive/preventive maintenance data.

The Diagnostics tab displays possible reasons for the device not being ready.
See Diagnostics Tab on page 28

Alarms Tab

The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the
alarms page changes color to show the current active alarm status. A blinking
alarm icon indicates that one or more alarms must be acknowledged or the
device must be reset. See Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm) on page 51 for
more information.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 371

Chapter 6 Valves Family

Motor-operated Valve The P_ValveMO (Motor-operated Valve) Add-On Instruction is used to

operate (open and close) a motor-operated valve in various command sources,
(P_ValveMO) monitoring for fault conditions.

Display Elements

A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced

multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix system, aid consistency and save engineering time.
Table 269 - P_ValveMO Display Elements Description
Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_P_ValveMO Standard motor-operated valve
GO_P_ValveMO1 global objects.
GO_P_ValveMO2
GO_P_ValveMO3

372 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Valves Family Chapter 6

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator command source. Several features are common to all Add-On
Instructions faceplates for the valves family. See Common Valves Faceplates on
page 351.

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot, temporarily work around device
problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance. Several features are
common to all Add-On Instructions faceplates for the valves family.
See Common Valves Faceplates on page 351.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 373

Chapter 6 Valves Family

Advanced Properties Display

The Advanced Properties Display opens to the advanced maintenance settings.

The Advanced Properties Display provides access to device configuration
parameters and ranges, and options for device and I/O setup. This tab is used
for initial system commissioning or later system changes.

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Table 270 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type the amount of time (in seconds) with no motion after a command for an alarm to occur.
2 Type the amount of time (in seconds) to reach position after a command before an alarm occurs.
3 Type the amount of time (in seconds) to pulse the valve outputs.
0 means that the outputs are always on.

374 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Valves Family Chapter 6

Engineering Tab

1
2
3

4
5
6
7
8

Table 271 - Engineering Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Check if the valve has a closed limit switch and the switch is wired to Inp_ClosedLS for position
monitoring.
2 Check if the valve has an open limit switch and the switch is wired to Inp_OpenLS for position
monitoring.
3 Click ‘ON’ if both limit switches are off when the valve is moving in normal operation.
Click ‘OFF’ if both limit switches are on when the valve is moving in normal operation. This selection
determines which limit switch combination indicates abnormal operation.
4 Check to allow operator commands to reset any previous faults (I/O fault, transit stall, full stall,
interlock trip), then move the valve.
Clear this checkbox to reset faults by using only the reset command.
5 Check to allow External commands to reset any previous faults (I/O fault, transit stall, full stall, interlock
trip), then move the valve.
Clear this checkbox to reset faults by using only the reset command.
6 Check if a signal used to stop valve motion is connected to the Out_Stop output of the instruction. This
action makes the Stop command button visible on the Operator tab.
7 Check to allow the state to change when coasting into the limit switch.
Clear this checkbox keep the state when coasting into the limit switch.
8 Check to bypass permissives that can be bypassed in Override command source.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 375

Chapter 6 Valves Family

1
2
3
4

Table 272 - Engineering Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Check to send a stop output to the valve and clear the Open and Close outputs when an I/O Fault
condition occurs.
Clear this checkbox to keep the outputs to the valve in their current state on an I/O Fault condition.
IMPORTANT: When this checkbox is checked and an I/O Fault condition occurs, a reset is required
before the valve can be energized.
2 Check to send a stop output to the valve and clear the Open and Close outputs when a Transit Stall
condition occurs.
Clear this checkbox to keep the outputs to the valve in their current state (keep trying) on a Transit Stall
condition. (A Transit Stall means the valve, when commanded to move, moved off its original position,
but did not reach its commanded position before the Transit Stall time expired.)
IMPORTANT: When this checkbox is checked and a Transit Stall condition occurs, a reset is required
before the valve can be energized.
3 Check to send a stop output to the valve and clear the Open and Close outputs when a Full Stall
condition occurs.
Clear this checkbox to keep the outputs to the valve in their current state (keep trying) on a Full Stall
condition. (A Full Stall means the valve, when commanded to move, did not move off its original
position before the Full Stall time expired.)
IMPORTANT: When this checkbox is checked and a Full Stall condition occurs, a reset is required before
the valve can be energized.
4 Check to send a stop output to the valve and clear the Open and Close outputs when an Actuator Fault
condition occurs.
Clear this checkbox to keep the outputs to the valve in their current state on an Actuator Fault
condition.
IMPORTANT: When this checkbox is checked and an Actuator Fault condition occurs, a reset is required
before the valve can be energized.
5 Type the time delay (in seconds) for the opened or closed status to be echoed back when Simulation is
enabled or when limit switch feedback is not used.

376 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Valves Family Chapter 6

HMI Configuration Tab

The HMI configuration tab provides access to displayed text, and faceplate-to-
faceplate navigation settings. Configure the description, label, tag, and security
area for the device. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for the
description of the common attributes.

1
2
3

Table 273 - HMI Configuration Tab Description

Item Description
1 Check if you have a P_Perm instruction that is used with this valve for Open Permissives. This action
changes the Permissive indicator to a clickable button to open the Permissive faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Permissive object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_OpenPerm’. For example, if your P_ValveMO object has the name ‘ValveMO123’, then its
Permissive object must be named ‘ValveMO123_OpenPerm’.
2 Check if you have a P_Perm instruction that is used with this valve for Close Permissives. This action
changes the Permissive indicator to a clickable button to open the Permissive faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Permissive object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_ClosePerm’. For example, if your P_ValveMO object has the name ‘ValveMO123’, then its
Permissive object must be named ‘ValveMO123_ClosePerm’.
3 Check if a Valve Stats object is used with this valve. This action makes the Valve Statistics button visible;
click this button to open the Valve Statistics faceplate for this valve.
IMPORTANT: The name of the ValveStats object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_ValveStats’. For example, if your P_ValveMO object has the name ‘ValveMO123’, then its
Valve Stats object must be named ‘ValveMO123_ValveStats’.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 377

Chapter 6 Valves Family

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications that are helpful to diagnose or help
prevent device problems. The device problems can include specific reasons a
device is 'Not Ready', device warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and
predictive/preventive maintenance data.

The Diagnostics tab displays possible reasons for the device not being ready.
See Diagnostics Tab on page 28

Alarms Tab

The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the
alarms page changes color to show the current active alarm status. A blinking
alarm icon indicates that one or more alarms must be acknowledged or the
device must be reset. See Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm) on page 51 for
more information.

378 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Valves Family Chapter 6

Mix-proof Valve (P_ValveMP) The Mix-proof Valve (P_ValveMP) Add-On Instruction controls one mix-
proof valve in various command sources and states. This valve can also check
position feedback inputs to verify that the valve reached the commanded
position. An alarm can be provided on failure to reach a target position.

Display Elements
A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced
multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix system, aid consistency and save engineering time.

Table 274 - P_ValveMP Display Element Description

Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_P_ValveMP2D This Mix-proof Valve graphic object
allows for numerous orientations on
displays.

GO_P_ValveMP_Orth This 3-D orthogonal Mix-proof Valve

graphic object provides different
valve angle positions on displays.

GO_P_ValveMP_Orth1 This 3-D orthogonal Mix-proof Valve

graphic object provides different
valve angle positions on displays.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 379

Chapter 6 Valves Family

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator command source. Several features are common to all Add-On
Instructions faceplates for the valves family. See Common Valves Faceplates on
page 351.

2
3
4
5

Table 275 - Operator Tab Description

Item Description
1 Click to go to the CIP/SIP Valve Lower Seat state.
2 Click to go to the CIP/SIP Valve Upper Seat state.
3 Click to go to the CIP/SIP Valve Cavity state.
4 Click to go to the Lift Valve Lower Seat state.
5 Click to go to the Lift Valve Upper Seat state.

380 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Valves Family Chapter 6

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot, temporarily work around device
problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance. Several features are
common to all Add-On Instructions faceplates for the valves family.
See Common Valves Faceplates on page 351.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 381

Chapter 6 Valves Family

Advanced Properties Display

The Advanced Properties Display opens to the advanced maintenance settings.

The Advanced Properties Display provides access to device configuration
parameters and ranges, and options for device and I/O setup. This tab is used
for initial system commissioning or later system changes.

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Table 276 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Type a value (seconds) that gives the valve time to achieve state before triggering a valve failure fault.
2 Type a value (seconds) that the valve seat is held closed when pulsing for cleaning.
3 Type a value (seconds) that the valve seat is held open when pulsing for cleaning.

382 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Valves Family Chapter 6

Table 277 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Click a state box to open the State Configuration display to access configuration parameters for the
valve state

State Configuration Display

1 3

Table 278 - State Configuration Display Description

Item Description
1 Set State of each Output in the selected valve state.
2 Check to require a feedback signals for the selected valve state.
3 Sets the desired value of the feedback signals for the selected valve state.
4 Type a value (seconds) the feedback must match for the valve to achieve the selected state.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 383

Chapter 6 Valves Family

Engineering Tab

1
2

3
4

5
6

Table 279 - Engineering Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Check to enable the lift lower seat state for the valve.
2 Check to enable pulsing in the lift lower state.
3 Check to enable the lift upper seat state for the valve.
4 Check to enable pulsing in the lift upper state.
5 Check to enable the SIP lower seat state for the valve.
6 Check to enable pulsing in the SIP/CIP lower state.
7 Check to enable the SIP upper seat state for the valve.
8 Check to enable pulsing in the SIP/CIP upper state.
9 Check to enable the SIP cavity state for the valve.

384 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Valves Family Chapter 6

2
3

4
5
6

Table 280 - Engineering Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Check to reset a fault on a new Operator command.
2 Check to reset a fault on a new External command.
3 Check to bypass permissives and interlocks in Override command source.
4 Check to close the valve when an I/O Fault occurs. A reset is required to clear this latched shed
condition.
Clear this checkbox to show only the I/O fault status/alarm and not trip the valve if an I/O fault is
detected.
5 Check to close the valve when a Position Fail occurs. A reset is required to clear this latched shed
condition.
Clear this checkbox to show only the Position Fail status/alarm and not trip the valve if a Position Fail is
detected.
6 The device always sheds (closes) on an interlock trip. This item cannot be unchecked. It is displayed as a
reminder that the interlock trip function always triggers a shed.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 385

Chapter 6 Valves Family

HMI Configuration Tab

The HMI configuration tab provides access to displayed text, and faceplate-to-
faceplate navigation settings. Configure the description, label, tag, and security
area for the device. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for the
description of the common attributes.

2
3

Table 281 - HMI Configuration Tab Description

Item Description
1 Check if a Permissive object is used with this valve. This check changes the Permissive indicator to a
clickable button to open the Permissive faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Permissive object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_Perm’. For example, if your P_ValveMP object has the name ’ValveMP123’, then its
Permissive object must be named ‘ValveMP123_Perm’.
2 Check if an Interlock object is used with this valve. This check changes the Interlock indicator to a
clickable button to open the Interlock faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the interlock object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_Intlk’. For example, if your P_ValveMP object has the name ’ValveMP123’, then its interlock
object must be named ‘ValveMP123_Intlk’.
3 Check if the Valve Stats instruction (for example, P_ValveStats) is used with this device. This check adds
a button to the faceplate that opens the Valve Stats faceplate.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Valve Statistics object in the controller must be the name of the object
with the suffix ‘_ValveStats’. For example, if your P_ValveMP object has the name ’ValveMP123’, then
its Interlock object must be named ‘ValveMP123_ValveStats’.

386 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Valves Family Chapter 6

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications that are helpful to diagnose or help
prevent device problems. The device problems can include specific reasons a
device is 'Not Ready', device warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and
predictive/preventive maintenance data.

The Diagnostics tab displays possible reasons for the device not being ready.
See Diagnostics Tab on page 28

Alarms Tab

The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the
alarms page changes color to show the current active alarm status. A blinking
alarm icon indicates that one or more alarms must be acknowledged or the
device must be reset. See Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm) on page 51 for
more information.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 387

Chapter 6 Valves Family

Solenoid-operated Valve The P_ValveSO (Solenoid-operated Valve) Add-On Instruction is used to

operate (open and close) a solenoid-operated valve in various command
(P_ValveSO) sources, monitoring for fault conditions.

Display Elements

A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced

multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix system, aid consistency and save engineering time.

Table 282 - P_ValveSO Display Element Description

Display Element Name Display Element Description
P_ValveSO Standard solenoid-operated valve
P_ValveSO1 global objects.
P_ValveSO2
P_ValveSO3

388 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Valves Family Chapter 6

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator command source. Several features are common to all Add-On
Instructions faceplates for the valves family. See Common Valves Faceplates on
page 351.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 389

Chapter 6 Valves Family

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot, temporarily work around device
problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance. Several features are
common to all Add-On Instructions faceplates for the valves family.
See Common Valves Faceplates on page 351.

1
2

Table 283 - Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Check if the instruction uses the closed limit switch feedback to check for valve full stall or transit stall.
2 Check if the instruction uses the open limit switch feedback to check for valve full stall or transit stall.

390 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Valves Family Chapter 6

Advanced Properties Display

The Advanced Properties Display opens to the advanced maintenance settings.

The Advanced Properties Display provides access to device configuration
parameters and ranges, and options for device and I/O setup. This tab is used
for initial system commissioning or later system changes.

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Table 284 - Advance Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type the amount of time to allow for the valve to move off the current position before raising a Full Stall
alarm.
2 Type the amount of time to allow for completing valve travel before raising a Transit Stall alarm.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 391

Chapter 6 Valves Family

Engineering Tab

1
2
3

4
5
6
7

Table 285 - Engineering Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Check if the valve has a closed limit switch and the switch is wired to Inp_ClosedLS for position
monitoring.
2 Check if the valve has an open limit switch and the switch is wired to Inp_OpenLS for position
monitoring.
3 Click ON if both limit switches are OFF when the valve is in motion.
Click OFF if both limit switches are ON when the valve is in motion. This selection determines how the
instruction detects a stuck limit switch.
4 Check to allow an Operator Open or Close command to reset any previous faults (I/O Fault, Transit Stall,
Full Stall, Interlock Trip), then open or close the valve.
Clear this checkbox to reset faults by using the Reset command.
5 Check to allow an External Open or Close command to reset any previous faults (I/O Fault, Transit Stall,
Full Stall, Interlock Trip), then open or close the valve.
Clear this checkbox to reset faults by using the Reset command.
6 Check if the valve fails Open for energize-to-close operation.
Clear this checkbox if the valve fails Closed for energize-to-open operation.
7 Check to bypass interlocks and permissives (that can be bypassed) in Override command source.

392 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Valves Family Chapter 6

1
2
3
4

Table 286 - Engineering Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Check to de-energize the output to the valve and return it to its fail position, when an I/O Fault
condition occurs.
Clear this checkbox to keep the output to the valve in its current state on an I/O Fault condition.
IMPORTANT: When this checkbox is checked and an I/O Fault condition occurs, a Reset is required
before the valve can be energized.
2 Check to de-energize the output to the valve and attempt to return it to its fail position, when a Transit
Stall condition occurs.
Clear this checkbox to keep the output to the valve in its current state (keep trying) on a Transit Stall
condition. (A Transit Stall means the valve, when commanded to move, moved off its original position,
but did not reach its commanded position before the Transit Stall time expired.)
IMPORTANT: When this checkbox is checked and a Transit Stall condition occurs, a Reset is required
before the valve can be energized.
3 Check to de-energize the output to the valve, attempting to return it to its fail position, when a Full
Stall condition occurs.
Clear this checkbox to keep the output to the valve in its current state (keep trying) on a Full Stall
condition. (A Full Stall means the valve, when commanded to move, did not move off its original
position before the Full Stall time expired.)
IMPORTANT: When this checkbox is checked and a Full Stall condition occurs, a Reset is required before
the valve can be energized.
4 The valve outputs are always de-energized on an Interlock Trip. This item cannot be unchecked. It is
displayed as a reminder that the Interlock Trip function always de-energizes the valve.
5 Sets the time delay (in seconds) for the opened or closed status to be echoed back when Simulation is
enabled or when limit switch feedback is not used.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 393

Chapter 6 Valves Family

HMI Configuration Tab

The HMI configuration tab provides access to displayed text, and faceplate-to-
faceplate navigation settings. Configure the description, label, tag, and security
area for the device. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for the
description of the common attributes.

1
2

Table 287 - HMI Configuration Tab Description

Item Description
1 Check if a permissive object is connected to the Permissive input. This action changes the Permissive
indicator to a clickable button.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Permissive object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_Perm’. For example, if your P_ValveSO object has the name ’ValveSO123’, then its
Permissive object must be named ‘ValveSO123_Perm’.
2 Check if an interlock object is connected to the Interlock input. This action changes the Interlock
indicator to a clickable button.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Interlock object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_Intlk’. For example, if your P_ValveSO object has the name’ValveSO123’, then its Interlock
object must be named ‘ValveSO123_Intlk’.
3 Check if a Valve Stats object is used with this valve. This action makes the Valve Statistics button visible.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Valve Stats object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_ValveStats’. For example, if your P_ValveSO object has the name’ValveSO123’, then its Valve
Stats object must be named ‘ValveSO123_ValveStats’

394 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Valves Family Chapter 6

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications that are helpful to diagnose or help
prevent device problems. The device problems can include specific reasons a
device is 'Not Ready', device warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and
predictive/preventive maintenance data.

The Diagnostics tab displays possible reasons for the device not being ready.
See Diagnostics Tab on page 28

Alarms Tab

The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the
alarms page changes color to show the current active alarm status. A blinking
alarm icon indicates that one or more alarms must be acknowledged or the
device must be reset. See Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm) on page 51 for
more information.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 395

Chapter 6 Valves Family

2-state Valve Statistics The P_ValveStats (2-state Valve Statistics) Add-On Instruction monitors a
2-state (open and close) valve and records various statistics that are related to
(P_ValveStats) stroke times and stroke counts.

Display Elements

A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced

multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix system, aid consistency and save engineering time.

Table 288 - P_ValveStats Display Element Description

Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_P_ValveStats This GO_P_ValveStats object can
be added to application graphics
to access valve statistics. A similar
object is already included on
faceplates for 2-state valves to
provide access to valve statistics.

396 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Valves Family Chapter 6

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator command source. Several features are common to all Add-On
Instructions faceplates for the valves family. See Common Valves Faceplates on
page 351.

The Operator tab shows the following information:

• Completion information and moving average for close and open strokes.
• Count and last stroke information for slow close and slow open strokes.
• Current, last, maximum, and total time in different states.

Table 289 - Operator Tab Description

Item Description
1 Click this symbol to reset an accumulated time or count.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 397

Chapter 6 Valves Family

Advanced Properties Display

The Advanced Properties Display opens to the engineering settings. The

Advanced Properties Display provides access to device configuration
parameters and ranges, and options for device and I/O setup. This tab is used
for initial system commissioning or later system changes.

Engineering Tab

Table 290 - Engineering Tab Description

Item Description
1 Check when a valve has stopped or other state to monitor.
2 Type the number of seconds to give the valve to close before counting a slow close stroke.
3 Type the number of seconds to give the valve to open before counting a slow open stroke.

398 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Valves Family Chapter 6

HMI Configuration Tab

The HMI configuration tab provides access to displayed text, and faceplate-to-
faceplate navigation settings. Configure the description, label, tag, and security
area for the device. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for the
description of the common attributes.

Table 291 - HMI Configuration Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type a name for the Stopped or other state of the valve.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 399

Chapter 6 Valves Family

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications that are helpful to diagnose or help
prevent device problems. The device problems can include specific reasons a
device is 'Not Ready', device warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and
predictive/preventive maintenance data.

The Diagnostics tab displays possible reasons for the device not being ready.
See Diagnostics Tab on page 28

Alarms Tab

The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the
alarms page changes color to show the current active alarm status. A blinking
alarm icon indicates that one or more alarms must be acknowledged or the
device must be reset. See Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm) on page 51 for
more information.

400 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Valves Family Chapter 6

n-Position Device (P_nPos) The P_nPos (n-Position Device) Add-On Instruction controls a circular or
linear discrete device with 2…8 positions. The P_nPos instruction provides
outputs to select an individual position and outputs to move toward increasing
positions (‘clockwise’ for a circular device) or decreasing positions
(‘counterclockwise’ for a circular device).

For linear devices, the P_nPos instruction can be configured to return to

Position 1 on every move, approaching the target position from the ‘same side’
on each move to improve position repeatability, or move directly to the
new position.

For circular devices, the P_nPos instruction can be configured to move only
‘clockwise’ to increase positions (for example, 6, 7, 8, 1, 2…). The instruction
can also be configured to move both directions by using the shortest move (for
example, ‘clockwise’ from 6…1: 6, 7, 8, 1; or ‘counterclockwise’ from 2…7: 2, 1,
8, 7).

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 401

Chapter 6 Valves Family

Display Elements

A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced

multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix system, aid consistency and save engineering time.

Table 292 - P_nPos Display Elements Description

Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_P_nPos_8SelValve These display elements are
used for routing one flow path
to many vertically. These
elements show all 3, 4, 6, or 8
ports and unused ports are not
GO_P_nPos_8SelValve1 hidden.

GO_P_nPos_6SelValve

GO_P_nPos_6SelValve1

GO_P_nPos_4SelValve

GO_P_nPos_4SelValve1

GO_P_nPos_3SelValve

GO_P_nPos_3SelValve1

402 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Valves Family Chapter 6

Table 292 - P_nPos Display Elements Description

Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_P_nPos_8PosRotary These display elements are
used for rotary selection from
one port to many ports. Only
the ports that are enabled are
displayed. For example, if you
configure the P_nPos
instruction with five positions,
ports 6, 7, and 8 are not
displayed.
GO_P_nPos_6PosRotary

GO_P_nPos_4PosRotary

GO_P_nPos_SlideGate These display elements show a

linear multi-position device.
The symbol is animated to
show the position that is based
GO_P_nPos_SlideGate1 on the number of positions
configured.

GO_P_nPos These display elements are

similar to those elements
shown on the first page of this
table, but ports that aren’t
configured are not displayed.

GO_P_nPos1

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 403

Chapter 6 Valves Family

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator command source. Several features are common to all Add-On
Instructions faceplates for the valves family. See Common Valves Faceplates on
page 351.

Table 293 - Operator Tab Description

Item Description
1 Current Device Position.

404 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Valves Family Chapter 6

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot, temporarily work around device
problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance. Several features are
common to all Add-On Instructions faceplates for the valves family.
See Common Valves Faceplates on page 351.

1
1
2
2

Table 294 - Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Check to have the instruction use the Position Feedback to check the position of the device.
2 Check to have the instruction use the index cylinder position feedback.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 405

Chapter 6 Valves Family

Advanced Properties Display

The Advanced Properties Display opens to the advanced maintenance settings.

The Advanced Properties Display provides access to device configuration
parameters and ranges, and options for device and I/O setup. This tab is used
for initial system commissioning or later system changes.

Advanced Maintenance Tab

Table 295 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Type a value (0…2,147,483) that indicates the maximum time that is allowed for lock feedback before
a fail.
2 Type a value (0…2,147,483) that indicates the maximum time that is allowed for the device to be in
position before a fail.
3 Type a value (0…2,147,483) that indicates the time delay before engaging a cylinder move.
4 Type a value (0…2,147,483) that indicates the delay time to verify that a device is in a commanded
position.
5 Type a value (0…2,147,483) to indicate the number of retires for a device in Position 1 before a fault
is set.

406 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Valves Family Chapter 6

1 4

3 5

Table 296 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 This state is highlighted whenever the device is in the position that it was last commanded.
2 This state is highlighted if the device feedback fails to confirm that the device is unlocked, moved to
position, or locked as requested within the configured failure times.
3 This state is displayed only if the device is configured with a lock or seal that must be unlocked or
unsealed to move. This state is highlighted when the device has reached its commanded position and
has been commanded to lock, but locked feedback has not been received yet.
4 This state is displayed only if the device is configured with a lock or seal that must be unlocked or
unsealed to move. This state is highlighted when the device has been commanded to unlock, but
unlocked feedback has not been received yet.
5 This state is highlighted when the device is being moved to its commanded position, but that position
feedback has not been received yet.

There is an additional state that is not identified in this diagram.

• State 3 - Moving to Position - This state is displayed only if the device
is configured as a linear device that returns to position 1 on every
move. This strategy is used to approach each position from the same
side. This state is highlighted when the device has been unlocked and
is being moved to position 1, but position 1 feedback has not been
received yet.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 407

Chapter 6 Valves Family

Engineering Tab

3
4

Table 297 - Engineering Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Click circular or linear for the device type.
2 For Circular, click either clockwise only or clockwise or counterclockwise.

For Linear, click whether the device returns to Position 1 for every move or moves directly to the target
position.
3 Check to reset a fault on a new Operator command.
4 Check to reset a fault on a new External command.
5 Check to bypass permissives and interlocks in Override command source.

408 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Valves Family Chapter 6

1
2
3
4

7
8
9

Table 298 - Engineering Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Check to enable device feedback for all positions.
2 Check to enable a new position command to be received and processed while a move is in progress.
3 Check to keep a position output On until the next move.
4 Check to enable indexing cylinders with position feedback.
5 Check if the device must be unlocked to move and locked when the move is complete.
6 Check if the device has feedback for locked/unlocked positions.
7 Type the time (0…2,147,483) to reach a target position in simulation.
8 Type the time (0…2,147,483) to lock/unlock with the device in simulation.
9 Type the time (0…2,147,483) to simulate index cylinder feedback in simulation.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 409

Chapter 6 Valves Family

Table 299 - Engineering Tab Page 3 Description

Item Description
1 Check to enable whether an I/O Fault, Failure to Reach Position, or Lock Failure is considered a shed
condition.
The device always sheds on an Interlock Trip. This item cannot be unchecked. It is displayed as a
reminder that the Interlock Trip function always triggers a shed.
If a condition causes the device to shed, a reset is required to operate the device.
2 Click to determine whether the device holds the hold position or goes to position 1 upon a shed
condition.

410 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Valves Family Chapter 6

HMI Configuration Tab

The HMI configuration tab provides access to displayed text, and faceplate-to-
faceplate navigation settings. Configure the description, label, tag, and security
area for the device. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25 for the
description of the common attributes.

Table 300 - HMI Configuration Tab Description

Item Description
1 Check to indicate that a permissive object is connected to the permissive inputs of this object.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Permissives object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_Perm’. For example, if your P_nPos object has the name ’nPos123’, then its Permissives
object must be named ‘nPos123_Perm’.
2 Check to indicate that an interlock object is connected to the interlock inputs of this object.
IMPORTANT: The name of the Interlock object in the controller must be the name of the object with
the suffix ‘_Intlk’. For example, if your P_nPos object has the name ’nPos123’, then its Interlock object
must be named ‘nPos123_Intlk’.
3 Type a name for each device position that is based on the number of positions.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 411

Chapter 6 Valves Family

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications that are helpful to diagnose or help
prevent device problems. The device problems can include specific reasons a
device is 'Not Ready', device warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and
predictive/preventive maintenance data.

The Diagnostics tab displays possible reasons for the device not being ready.
See Diagnostics Tab on page 28

Alarms Tab

The Alarms tab displays each configured alarm. The icon on the tab for the
alarms page changes color to show the current active alarm status. A blinking
alarm icon indicates that one or more alarms must be acknowledged or the
device must be reset. See Common Alarm Block (P_Alarm) on page 51 for
more information.

412 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Valves Family Chapter 6

Discrete 2-, 3-, 4-state Device The P_D4SD (Discrete 2-, 3-, 4-state Device) Add-On Instruction controls
and monitors feedback from a discrete 2-state, 3-state, or 4-state device in
(P_D4SD) various command sources, monitoring for fault conditions. These devices
include multiple-speed motors or multiple-position valves.

See Discrete 2-, 3-, 4-state Device (P_D4SD) on page 253

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 413

Chapter 6 Valves Family

Notes:

414 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Chapter 7

Built-in Instructions Family

The faceplates that appear in this section are designed to let the function
blocks and built-in firmware instructions for the Logix 5000 controllers
interface with the Process Library Add-on Instructions.

For details on built-in instructions, see the Logix 5000 Controllers Advanced
Process Control and Drives Instructions Reference Manual, publication 1756-
RM006.

Proportional + Integral + The Studio 5000 Logix Designer® application PIDE autotuner provides an
openloop autotuner that is built into the PIDE instruction. This function
Derivative Enhanced (PIDE) filters a signal to assist with the calculation of control variables. You can
Autotune autotune from PanelView™ Plus terminals or any other operator interface
devices and Logix Designer application.

The PIDE block has an Autotune Tag (type PIDE_AUTOTUNE) that you
specify for those PIDE blocks that you want to autotune.

IMPORTANT The PIDE autotuner is installed with the Logix Designer application,
but you need an activation key to enable the autotuner. The
autotuner is supported only in function block programming; it is not
available in relay ladder or structured text programming.

The Autotune function is accessed through the Advanced Maintenance tab of

the Built-in PIDE faceplate.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 415

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

Autotune Page 1

1 3

4
2

Table 301 - Autotune Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Tag Status Indicator
2 Click the item that best describes the process.
3 Click to acquire the Autotune tag.
4 Click to release the Autotune tag.
5 Type a value for the PV Change Limit. The autotune is aborted if the PV changes by more than this
amount.

416 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

Autotune Page 2

1 3

Table 302 - Autotune Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Autotune Status Indicator
2 Type a value for CV step size in percent for the tuning step test.
3 Click to start the Autotune process for CV1, CV2, and CV3.
4 Click to stop the Autotune process.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 417

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

Autotune Page 3

4
2 5

3 6

Table 303 - Autotune Page 3 Description

Item Description
1 Click an option for response speed.
2 Press the ‘Use Gains’ button to copy the selected gains into the current PIDE gain tags.
3 Autotune Status Indicator
4 Type a value for Proportional gain.
5 Type a value for Integral gain.
6 Type a value for Derivative gain.

418 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

Coordinated Control (CC) The Coordinated Control (CC) function block controls one process variable
by manipulating as many as three different control variables. As an option, any
of the three outputs can be used as an input to create feed forward action in the
control variable. The CC function block calculates the control variables (CV1,
CV2, and CV3) in the Auto mode based on the PV - SP deviation, internal
models, and tuning.

Display Elements

A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced

multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix® system, aid consistency and save engineering time.
Table 304 - Coordinated Control Display Elements Description
Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_BuiltIn_CC Coordinated Control object with a
Process Variable and three Control
Variables.

GO_BuiltIn_CC1 Coordinated Control object with a

Process Variable, Setpoint, and three
Control Variables.

GO_BuiltIn_CC2 Coordinated Control object with a

Process Variable and a Setpoint.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 419

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator mode. Several features are common to all Add-On Instructions
faceplates. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.

5 6

1 7

8
2

Table 305 - Operator Tab Description

Item Description
1 Current setpoint
2 Current process variable
3 Setpoint slider
4 Process variable indicator
5 Type a value for control variable output (CV1, CV2, CV3).
6 Control variable sliders
7 Manual loop
8 Auto loop

420 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot, temporarily work around device
problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance. Several features are
common to all Add-On Instructions faceplates. See Basic Faceplate Attributes
on page 25

1
2

4
5

Table 306 - Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type the setpoint high threshold.
2 Type the setpoint low threshold.
3 Type the CV high and low, in percent (CV1, CV2, CV3).
4 Type the CV Rate of Change positive limit, in percent per second. (CV1, CV2, CV3).
Rate of change limiting is used only when in Auto mode or in Manual mode if CVManLimiting is true. A
value of zero disables CV1 ROC limiting.
5 Type the CV Rate of Change negative limit, in percent per second. (CV1, CV2, CV3).
Rate of change limiting is used only when in Auto mode or in Manual mode if CVManLimiting is true. A
value of zero disables CV1 ROC limiting.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 421

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

Advanced Tab

Tuning

The tuning tab consists of separate pages for each CV. The example that
follows shows page 1. Pages for the additional CV settings have the same setup
parameters. Click the page numbers to advance to the next CV.

1
2
3
4
5

Table 307 - Tuning Tab Description

Item Description
1 Enter the target value for CV, CV2, or CV3.
2 Enter the CV1, CV2, or CV3 gain.
3 Enter the CV1, CV2, or CV3 time constant.
4 Enter the deadtime forCV1, CV2, or CV3.
5 Enter the CV1, CV2, or CV3 response time constant. This value determines the speed of the CV in seconds.
6 Click to open the CC Autotune (CV1, CV2, or CV3) faceplate. See Coordinated Control (CC) Autotune on
page 432.
7 Click to request Auto Loop mode.

422 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

Maintenance Tab

2
3
4

Table 308 - Maintenance Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Type the Operator setpoint.
2 Type the maximum limit for the setpoint.
3 Type the minimum limit for the setpoint.
4 Actual Setpoint
5 Type the maximum and minimum limits for the PV in engineering units.
6 Calculated values that are used on the next page.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 423

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

This example shows the functions for CV1, CV2, and CV3. The functions for
CV1 are described. The functions for CV2 and CV3 are the same as CV1.

2
3
4
5

Table 309 - Maintenance Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Type in the value (%) for CV.
2 Type in the maximum limit for the CV.
3 Type in the minimum limit for the CV.
4 Type in the maximum CV Rate of Increase.
5 Type in the minimum CV Rate of Increase.
6 Turn on to enable CV tracking when autotune is off. This parameter is ignored in Hand and Operator
mode.

424 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

This example shows the functions for CV1, CV2, and CV3. The functions for
CV1 are described. The functions for CV2 and CV3 are the same as CV1.

2
3
4
5

Table 310 - Maintenance Tab Page 3 Description

Item Description
1 Type the CV1, CV2, or CV3 Override value.
CV1, CV2, or CV3 is set to this value when in Override mode.
This value is recommended to correspond to a safe state output of the loop.
2 CV output %
3 Type the maximum value for CV1EU, CV2EU, or CV3EU.
The value of CV1EU, CV2EU, or CV3EU that corresponds to 100% CV1, CV2, or CV3.
4 Type the minimum value for CV1EU, CV2EU, or CV3EU.
The value of CV1EU, CV2EU, or CV3EU that corresponds to 0% CV1, CV2, or CV3.
5 Current value (EU)

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 425

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

Engineering Tab

1
2
6
3
4 7

5 8

Table 311 - Engineering Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Check to limit the current value when in Manual mode.
2 Check to set the Loop mode to manual when CV initialization is requested.
Clear the checkbox to leave the Loop mode unchanged when initialization is requested. When the
initialization request clears, the loop resumes control in its previous Loop mode.
3 Check to reset Program inputs after each execution.
4 Click to Set true to enable PV Tracking when autotune is OFF.
This parameter is ignored in Hand and Override mode.
5 Click to select CV1, CV2, or CV3 to be the first, second, or third to act to compensate for PV-SP deviation.
6 Type the CV1, CV2, or CV3 target value.
7 Type a value for the Target Response Time Constant.
8 Click to set the PV target action priority for CV1, CV2, and CV3.

426 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

Table 312 - Engineering Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Click to select the time base execution mode.
2 Click to select the model gain units. (Percent or Engineering Units)

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 427

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

Faults Tab

Page 1 of the Faults tab displays PID Instruction faults.

Page 2 of the Faults tab displays PID Instruction Configuration Faults.

428 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

Trends Tab

The Trends tab shows trend charts of key device data over time. These faceplate
trends provide a quick view of current device performance to supplement, but
not replace, dedicated historical or live trend displays. For basic trends tab
functionality, See Trends Tab on page 29.

Table 313 - Trends Tab Description

Item Description
1 Click to open the trends for the PV with Setpoint.
2 Click to open the trend tab for the control variables.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 429

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

PV with Setpoint Trends Tab

CV Trends Tab

430 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications to diagnose device problems. This tab
includes device warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and predictive/
preventive maintenance data.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 431

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

Coordinated Control (CC) Autotune

2
3
4
5

Table 314 - CC Autotune Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Click either Integrating or Non-integrating.
2 Enter the PV change limit.
3 Type a value for the maximum time for autotune to complete following the CV step change.
When autotune exceeds this time, tuning is aborted.
4 Type a value for the integrating model approximation factor.
IMPORTANT: You can enter this value only when Integrating is selected as the Process Type.
5 Click Low, Medium, or High to set the estimate of the noise level that is expected on the PV to
compensate for it during tuning.

432 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

1
2

Table 315 - CC Autotune Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Type a value for CV1, CV2, or CV3 step size in percent for the tuning step test.
2 Click to start the autotune process.
3 Click to abort the autotune process.
This button also becomes active if the process is aborted due to an error.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 433

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

1
2
3
4

Table 316 - CC Autotune Tab Page 3 Description

Item Description
1 Type a value for the gain for CV1, CV2, or CV3.
Enter a positive or negative gain depending on process direction.
2 Type a value for CV1, CV2, or CV3 time constant in seconds.
3 Type a value for CV1, CV2, or CV3 deadtime in seconds.
4 Type a value for the tuning parameter that determines the speed of the control variable action for CV1,
CV2, or CV3 in seconds.
5 Click to replace the current model parameters with the calculated Autotune model parameters.

434 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

Internal Model Control (IMC) The Internal Model Control (IMC) function block controls one process
variable by manipulating one control-variable output. This function block
performs an algorithm where the actual error signal is compared against that of
an internal first-order lag plus deadtime model of the process. The IMC
function block calculates the control variable output (CV) in the Auto mode
based on the PV - SP deviation, internal model, and tuning.

Display Elements

A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced

multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix system, aid consistency and save engineering time.

Table 317 - IMC Display Elements Description

Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_BuiltIn_IMC Internal Model Control object with a
Process Variable and a Control Variable.

GO_BuiltIn_IMC2 Internal Model Control object with a

Process Variable, Setpoint, and a Control
Variable.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 435

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator mode. Several features are common to all Add-On Instructions
faceplates. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.

4
5
1 6

2 7

3 9

Table 318 - Operator Tab Description

Item Description
1 PV indicator
2 Move this slider to adjust the loop setpoint.
3 Click to request Cascade Loop mode.
IMPORTANT: This button is available only if 'Allow Cascade/Ratio Mode' on page 1 of the Engineering
tab is checked.
4 Type the SP Operator value, scaled in PV units.
SP is set to this value when in Operator control.
5 Type a value for the Ratio Operator multiplier.
Ratio is set to this value when in Operator control.
6 Type a value for CV Operator Manual value.
CV is set to this value when in Operator control and Manual mode.
7 Move this slider to adjust the loop CV output.
8 Click to request Manual Loop mode.
9 Click to request Auto Loop mode.

436 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot, temporarily work around device
problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance. Several features are
common to all Add-On Instructions faceplates. See Basic Faceplate Attributes
on page 25

Table 319 - Maintenance Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Type the SP maximum and minimum limits.
2 Type a value for the Ratio high and low limits.
These parameters limit the value of Ratio obtained from RatioProg or RatioOper.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 437

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

Table 320 - Maintenance Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Type values for the CV high and low limits.
It is also used for limiting CV when in Auto or CascadeRatio modes or Manual mode if CVManLimiting is
true.
2 CV increasing or decreasing rate of change limit, in percent per second.
The rate of change limiting is used only when in Auto or CascadeRatio modes or Manual mode if
CVManLimiting is true.
A value of zero disables CV ROC limiting.

438 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

Advanced Tab

Tuning

1
6
2
3 7
4

Table 321 - Tuning Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type a value for the internal model gain.
Enter a positive or negative gain depending on process direction.
2 Type a value for the internal model Time Constant in seconds.
3 Type a value for the internal model Deadtime in seconds.
4 Type a value for the tuning parameter that determines the speed of the control variable action in
seconds.
5 Click to request Cascade Loop mode.
6 Click to request Auto Loop mode.
7 Click to request Manual Loop mode.
8 Click to open the CV Autotune faceplate.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 439

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

Maintenance Tab

1 4

Table 322 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Type a value for the Ratio Operator multiplier.
Ratio is set to this value when in Operator control.
2 Type a value for the Ratio high and low limits.
These parameters limit the value of Ratio obtained from RatioProg or RatioOper.
3 Type the SP maximum and minimum limits.
4 Type a value for the SP Operator value, scaled in PV units.
SP is set to this value when in Operator control.

440 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

2
3
4
5

Table 323 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Type the minimum or maximum limits for the PV in engineering units.
2 Type a value for the internal model gain.
Enter a positive or negative gain depending on process direction.
3 Type a value for the internal model Time Constant in seconds.
4 Type a value for the internal model Deadtime in seconds.
5 Type a value for the tuning parameter that determines the speed of the control variable action in
seconds.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 441

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

Table 324 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Page 3 Description

Item Description
1 Type the operator CV value.
2 Type values for the CV high and low limits.
It is also used for limiting CV when in Auto or CascadeRatio modes or Manual mode if CVManLimiting is
true.
3 CV increasing or decreasing rate of change limit, in percent per second.
The rate of change limiting is used only when in Auto or CascadeRatio modes or Manual mode if
CVManLimiting is true.
A value of zero disables CV ROC limiting.
4 Check to enable CV Tracking when autotune is OFF.
This parameter is ignored in Hand and Override mode.

442 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

Table 325 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Page 4 Description

Item Description
1 Type the value for the CV Override value.
CV is set to this value when in Override mode.
2 Type the maximum or minimum value for CV EU scaling.
This value corresponds to 100% or 0% CV respectively.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 443

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

Engineering

1
2

4
5
6

7
8

Table 326 - Engineering Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Check if Cascade Loop mode is to be used.
IMPORTANT: Checking this option displays the Cascade button on the Operator tab.
2 Check to enable ratio control when in Cascade Loop mode.
IMPORTANT: Checking this option displays the current ratio multiplier, Operator ratio multiplier, and
Program ratio multiplier on the Operator tab.
Checking this option also displays the Cascade/Ratio portion of the SAMA diagram on page 1of the
Maintenance tab.
3 Check to limit the CV while in Manual mode.
4 Check to set the Loop mode to manual when CV initialization is requested.
Clear the checkbox to leave the Loop mode unchanged when initialization is requested. When the
initialization request clears, the loop resumes control in its previous Loop mode.
5 Check to reset Program inputs after each execution.
6 Check so that CV cannot increase in value.
7 Check so that CV cannot decrease in value.
8 Click to enable PV Tracking when autotune is OFF.
This parameter is ignored in Hand and Override mode.

444 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

Table 327 - Engineering Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Click to select the time base execution mode.
2 Click to choose the model gain units. (Percent or Engineering Units)

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 445

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

Faults Tab

Page 1 of the Diagnostics tab displays PID Instruction faults.

Page 2 of the Diagnostics tab displays PID Instruction Configuration faults.

446 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

Trends Tab

The Trends tab shows trend charts of key device data over time. These faceplate
trends provide a quick view of current device performance to supplement, but
not replace, dedicated historical or live trend displays. For basic trends tab
functionality, See Trends Tab on page 29.

Table 328 - Trends Tab Description

Item Description
1 Click to open the trends for the PV with Setpoint.
2 Click to open the trend tab for the control variables.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 447

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

PV with Setpoint Trends Tab

CV Trends Tab

448 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications to diagnose device problems. This tab
includes device warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and predictive/
preventive maintenance data.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 449

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

Internal Model Control (IMC) Autotune

The faceplates in this section let you access all necessary parameters to
autotune the IMC function block and hand-tune the instruction.

2
3
4

Table 329 - IMC Autotune Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Click either Integrating or Non-integrating.
2 Type a value for the PV limit scaled in PV units.
When Autotune is running and predicted PV exceeds this limit, the tuning is aborted.
3 Type a value for the maximum time for autotune to complete following the CV step change.
When autotune exceeds this time, tuning is aborted.
4 Type a value for the non-integrating model approximation factor.
IMPORTANT: You can enter this value only when Integrating is selected as the Process Type.
5 Click Low, Medium, or High to set the estimate of the noise level expected on the PV to compensate for it
during tuning.

450 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

3
1

Table 330 - IMC Autotune Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Click to start the autotune process.
2 Type a value for CV1, CV2, or CV3 step size in percent for the tuning step test.
3 Click to abort the autotune process.
This button also becomes active if the process is aborted due to an error.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 451

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

1
2
3
4

Table 331 - IMC Autotune Tab Page 3 Description

Item Description
1 Type a value for the internal model gain for CV1, CV2, or CV3.
Enter a positive or negative gain depending on process direction.
2 Type a value for CV1, CV2, or CV3 internal model time constant in seconds.
3 Type a value for CV1, CV2, or CV3 internal model deadtime in seconds.
4 Type a value for the tuning parameter that determines the speed of the control variable action for CV1,
CV2, or CV3 in seconds
5 Click to replace the current model parameters with the calculated Autotune model parameters.

452 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

Modular Multivariable The Modular Multivariable Control (MMC) function block controls two
process variables to their setpoints manipulating up to three control variables.
Control (MMC) The MMC function block calculates the control variables (CV1, CV2, and
CV3) in the Auto mode based on the PV1 - SP1, PV2 - SP2 deviation, internal
model, and tuning. The MMC function block is a flexible model-based
algorithm that can be used in two basic configuration modes:
• Three control variables used to control two interacting process variables
• Two control variables used to control two interacting process variables

Display Elements

A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced

multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix system, aid consistency and save engineering time.

Table 332 - MMC Display Elements Description

Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_BuiltIn_MMC Modular Multivariable Control object
with two process variables and three
control variables.

GO_BuiltIn_MMC1 Modular Multivariable Control object

with two process variables, two
setpoints, and three control variables.

GO_BuiltIn_MMC2 Modular Multivariable Control object

with two process variables and two
setpoints.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 453

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator mode. Several features are common to all Add-On Instructions
faceplates. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.

5 6

1 8

2
3

Table 333 - Operator Tab Description

Item Description
1 Current PV value
2 Current SP value
3 Setpoint Slider
4 PV Indicator
5 Operator CV Value
6 CV Slider
7 Click to request Manual Loop mode.
8 Click to request Auto Loop mode.

454 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot, temporarily work around device
problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance. Several features are
common to all Add-On Instructions faceplates. See Basic Faceplate Attributes
on page 25

Table 334 - Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type the high and low SP threshold.
2 Type the high and low CV threshold.
3 Type the positive and negative Rate of Change limit value.
Rate of change limiting is used only when in Auto mode or in Manual mode if CVManLimiting is true.
A value of zero disables CV1 ROC limiting.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 455

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

Advanced Tab

Tuning

The following diagram shows the functions for CV1 on page 1. CV2 and CV3
are covered on pages 2 and 3.

1
2
3

4
5
6
7
8
9
10

11

Table 335 - Tuning Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type the SP 1 value.
2 Type the SP2 value.
3 Type the CV value.
4 Type the Operator model gain for PV1: CV1, CV2, or CV3, PV2: CV1, CV2, or CV3.
This value is the internal model gain for CV# - PV#. enter a positive or negative gain depending on the
process direction.
5 Type the internal model time constant for PV1: CV1, CV2, or CV3, PV2: CV1, CV2, or CV3 in seconds.
6 Type the internal model deadtime for PV1: CV1, CV2, or CV3, PV2: CV1, CV2, or CV3
in seconds.
7 Type the internal Response time constant for PV1: CV1, CV2, or CV3, PV2: CV1, CV2, or CV3.
This value is the tuning parameter that determines the speed of the control variable action for CV# - PV#
in seconds.
8 Click to select '+' or '-' as the Process Gain sign for PV1: CV1, CV2, or CV3, PV2: CV1, CV2, or CV3.
This selection is used only for Autotune and is the sign of the process gain (ΔPV1/ΔCV1).
9 Click to show the Autotune (CV1, CV2, or CV3) Operator faceplate.
10 Click to request Manual loop mode.
11 Click to request Auto Loop mode.

456 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

Maintenance Tab

Table 336 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Type the Operator setpoint.
2 Type the high and low limits for the SP.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 457

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

Table 337 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Type the minimum and maximum PV configuration. (In engineering units.)

458 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

Table 338 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Page 3 Description

Item Description
1 Type the Operator CV value.
2 Type the CV high and CV low limits.
3 Type the maximum CV rate of increase and decrease configuration values.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 459

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

Table 339 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Page 4 Description

Item Description
1 Type the override value for the CV. The CV is set to this value when in the Override mode.
2 Type the CV maximum and minimum values in engineering units.

460 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

Engineering Tab

1 6
2

3
4

5 8

Table 340 - Engineering Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Limit CV1, CV2, or CV3 in Manual mode.
If in Manual mode and CVManLimiting is true, CV1, CV2, and CV3 are limited by the CV1, CV2, and CV3
HLimit and CV1, CV2, and CV3 LLimit values.
2 Check to set the Loop mode to manual when CV initialization is requested.
Clear the checkbox to leave the Loop mode unchanged when initialization is requested. When the
initialization request clears, the loop resumes control in its previous Loop mode.
3 Check to reset Program control values after each execution.
4 Check to enable SP to track PV.
This process is ignored when in Auto modes. SP tracks PV only when all three outputs are in manual. As
soon as any output returns to Auto, PVTracking stops.
5 Click to select the first CV to act to compensate for PV1-SP1 deviation.
Click to select the second CV to act to compensate for PV1-SP1 deviation.
Click to select the third CV to act to compensate for PV1-SP1 deviation.
6 Click to select the CV to be driven to its target.
7 Type the value that determines the speed with which the control variables approach their target values.
8 Click to select the first CV to act to compensate for PV2-SP2 deviation.
Click to select the second CV to act to compensate for PV2-SP2 deviation.
Click to select the third CV to act to compensate for PV2-SP2 deviation.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 461

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

Table 341 - Engineering Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Click to select Periodic, Oversampling, or Real-Time for the execution mode.
2 Select either 'EU' or '%' for the Model Gain units in Engineering Units or 'Percent of span'.

462 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

Faults

Page 1 of the Diagnostics tab displays PID Instruction faults.

Page 2 of the Diagnostics tab displays PID Instruction configuration faults.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 463

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

Trends Tab

The Trends tab shows trend charts of key device data over time. These faceplate
trends provide a quick view of current device performance to supplement, but
not replace, dedicated historical or live trend displays. For basic trends tab
functionality, See Trends Tab on page 29.

Table 342 - Trends Tab Description

Item Description
1 Click to open the trends for PV 1 with Setpoint.
2 Click to open the trends for PV 2 with Setpoint.
3 Click to open the trend tab for the control variables.

464 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

PV 1 with Setpoint 1 Trends

PV 2 with Setpoint 2 Trends

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 465

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

CV Trends

466 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications to diagnose device problems. This tab
includes device warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and predictive/
preventive maintenance data.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 467

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

Modular Multivariable Control (MMC) Autotune

The faceplates in this section let you access all necessary parameters to
autotune the MMC function block and hand-tune the instruction.

2
3

Table 343 - MMC Autotune Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Click either Integrating or Non-integrating.
2 Type a value for PV1 and PV2 limit scaled in PV units.
When Autotune is running and predicted PV exceeds this limit, the tuning is aborted.
3 Type a value for PV1 and PV2 maximum time (in minutes) for autotune to complete following the CV
step change.
When autotune exceeds this time, tuning is aborted.
4 Click Low, Medium, or High to set the estimate of the noise level expected on PV1 and PV2 to
compensate for it during tuning.

468 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

2 4
3

Table 344 - MMC Autotune Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Type a value for CV1 step size in percent for the tuning step test.
2 PV1 and PV2 Autotune status indicator
3 Click to start the autotune process.
4 Click to abort the autotune process.
This button also becomes active if the process is aborted due to an error.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 469

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

1
2
3
4

Table 345 - MMC Autotune Page 3 Description

Item Description
1 Type a value for the modular multivariable PV1 and PV2 gain.
Enter a positive or negative gain depending on process direction.
2 Type a value for the modular multivariable PV1 and PV2 time constant in seconds.
3 Type a value for the modular multivariable PV1 and PV2 deadtime in seconds.
4 Type a value for thePV1 and PV2 tuning parameter that determines the speed of the control variable
action in seconds
5 Click to replace the current PV1 and PV2 model parameters with the calculated Autotune PV1 and PV2
model parameters.

470 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

Proportional + Integral + The Proportional + Integral + Derivative Enhanced (PIDE) instruction

provides enhanced capabilities over the standard PID instruction. The
Derivative Enhanced (PIDE) instruction uses the velocity form of the PID algorithm. The gain terms are
applied to the change in the value of error or PV, not the value of error or PV.

Display Elements
A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced
multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix system, aid consistency and save engineering time.

Table 346 - MMC Display Elements Description

Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_Builtin_PIDE Proportional + Integral + Derivative
Enhanced object with one Process
Variables and one Control Variable.

GO_Builtin_PIDE1 Proportional + Integral + Derivative

Enhanced object with one Process
Variable, one Setpoint, and one Control
Variable.

GO_BuiltIn_PIDE_CV Proportional + Integral + Derivative

Enhanced (normal Control Valve for
horizontal pipe) object with one Process
Variable and one Control Variable.

GO_BuiltIn_PIDE_CV1 Proportional + Integral + Derivative

Enhanced (inverted Control Valve for
horizontal pipe) object with one Process
Variable and one Control Variable.

GO_BuiltIn_PIDE_CV2 Proportional + Integral + Derivative

Enhanced (Control Valve for vertical pipe
to the left) object with one Process
Variable and one Control Variable.

GO_BuiltIn_PIDE_CV3 Proportional + Integral + Derivative

Enhanced (Control Valve for vertical pipe
to the right) object with one Process
Variable and one Control Variable.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 471

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

Display Element Name Display Element Description

GO_BuiltIn_PIDE_CV4 Proportional + Integral + Derivative
Enhanced (normal Control Valve for
horizontal pipe) object with one Process
Variable, one Setpoint, and one Control
Variable.

GO_BuiltIn_PIDE_CV5 Proportional + Integral + Derivative

Enhanced (inverted Control Valve for
horizontal pipe) object with one Process
Variable, one Setpoint, and one Control
Variable.

GO_BuiltIn_PIDE_CV6 Proportional + Integral + Derivative

Enhanced (Control Valve for vertical pipe
to the left) object with one Process
Variable, one Setpoint, and one Control
Variable.

GO_BuiltIn_PIDE_CV7 Proportional + Integral + Derivative

Enhanced (Control Valve for vertical pipe
to the right) object with one Process
Variable, one Setpoint, and one Control
Variable.

472 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

Operator Tab

The faceplate initially opens to the Operator (‘Home’) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator mode.

4
5
1

6
7
2

3 9

Table 347 - Operator Tab Description

Item Description
1 Current PV value
2 PV Slider
3 Click to request Cascade Loop mode.
4 Type a value for the loop Setpoint.
5 Type a value for the ratio operator multiplier.
6 Type a value for CV.
7 Move this slider to adjust the loop CV output.
8 Click to go to request Manual loop mode.
9 Click to request Auto Loop mode.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 473

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot and temporarily work around
device problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance.

Table 348 - Maintenance Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Type values for the PV high-high, high, low, and low-low alarm limits.
2 Type a value for the PV alarm limit deadband.

Table 349 - Maintenance Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Type values for the Deviation high-high, high, low, and low-low alarm limits.
2 Type a value for the Deviation alarm limit deadband.

474 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

1
2
3

Table 350 - Maintenance Tab Page 3 Description

Item Description
1 Enter a value for the positive rate of change alarm limit.
2 Enter a value for the negative rate of change alarm limit.
3 Type a value for the PV Rate of change sample period. This value is the time period, in seconds, over
which the rate of change for PV is evaluated.
Type zero to disable the PV rate of change period checking.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 475

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

Advanced Tab

Tuning Tab

5
1
6
2
3
7
4

Table 351 - Tuning Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type the value for the control variable.
2 Type the value for the proportional gain.
3 Type the value for the integral gain.
4 Type the value for the derivative gain.
5 Click to request Cascade loop mode.
6 Click to request Auto Loop mode.
7 Click to request Manual Loop mode.
8 Click to show the Autotune (CV1, CV2, or CV3) Operator faceplate.

476 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

Maintenance Tab

Table 352 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Type a ratio Operator multiplier.
2 Type values for the high and low ratio limits.
These values limit the value of Ratio obtained from Operator or Program Ratio.
3 Type the high and low limits for the setpoint.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 477

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

1
2

3
4
5

Table 353 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Type a value for the zero-crossing deadband range.
Type zero to disable the zero-crossing deadband checking.
2 Type a value for the maximum and minimum scaled values for PV.
3 Type in a value for Proportional gain
4 Type in a value for Integral gain
5 Type in a value for Derivative gain

478 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

Table 354 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Page 3 Description

Item Description
1 Type a value for CV when in the Operator Manual mode.
2 Type values for the CV high and low limits.
3 Type a value for CV Rate of Change limit.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 479

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

Table 355 - Advanced Maintenance Tab Page 4 Description

Item Description
1 Type a value for CV when in the Override mode.
2 Type values for the maximum and minimum values for CV in engineering units.

480 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

Engineering

1
2
3

4
5
6

7
8

9
10

Table 356 - Advanced Engineering Tab Page 1 Description

Item Description
1 Check to enable Cascade loop mode.
2 Check to enable ratio control when in Cascade mode.
3 Click to smooth changes in the derivative term.
4 Check to limit CV in the Manual mode.
5 Check to set the Loop mode to manual when CV initialization is requested.
Clear the checkbox to leave the Loop mode unchanged when initialization is requested. When the
initialization request clears, the loop resumes control in its previous Loop mode.
6 Click to clear all program request inputs after each execution of the instruction.
7 Click to calculate the derivative term by using the change in the process variable (PVPercent).
Clear this checkbox to use the change in error (EPercent).
8 Click to calculate the proportional term by using the change in process variable (PVPercent).
Clear this checkbox to use the change in error (EPercent).
9 Click to have SP track PV when in Manual mode.
This setting is ignored when in Cascade or Auto mode.
10 Click to disable zero-crossing for the deadband calculation.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 481

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

Table 357 - Advanced Engineering Tab Page 2 Description

Item Description
1 Click to select the timing execution mode.

482 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

Table 358 - Advanced Engineering Tab Page 3 Description

Item Description
1 Click to select the method of calculating error.
2 Click to select Independent or Dependant for the gains equation.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 483

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

Faults Tab

Page 1 of the Diagnostics tab displays PID Instruction faults.

Page 2 of the Diagnostics tab displays PID Instruction configuration faults.

484 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

Trends Tab

The Trends tab shows trend charts of key device data over time. These faceplate
trends provide a quick view of current device performance to supplement, but
not replace, dedicated historical or live trend displays. For basic trends tab
functionality, See Trends Tab on page 29.

Table 359 - Trends Tab Description

Item Description
1 Click to open the trends for the PV with Setpoint.
2 Click to open the trends tab for the control variables.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 485

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

PV with Setpoint Trends Tab

CV Trends Tab

486 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications to diagnose device problems. This tab
includes device warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and predictive/
preventive maintenance data.

Ramp/Soak (RMPS) The Ramp/Soak (RMPS) instruction provides for a number of segments of
alternating ramp and soak periods.

Display Elements

A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced

multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix system, aid consistency and save engineering time.

Table 360 - RMPS Display Elements Description

Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_BuiltIn_RMPS Ramp Soak global object.

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator mode. Several features are common to all Add-On Instructions
faceplates. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 487

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

2
4

3 6

Table 361 - Operator Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type a value for the Operator Segment.
This value is used if Ramp/Soak is in the Manual mode.
2 Type a value for the Operator Soak Time Left.
This value is used if Ramp/Soak is in the Manual mode.
3 Click to initialize Current Segment and Soak Time Left.
4 Type a value for the Operator output value.
This value is used as the Output when Ramp/Soak is in the
Manual mode.
5 Click to request Manual Loop mode.
6 Click to request Auto Loop mode.

488 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot, temporarily work around device
problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance. Several features are
common to all Add-On Instructions faceplates. See Basic Faceplate Attributes
on page 25

The Maintenance tab has inputs for Ramp Time, Soak Time, and Soak Value
for each segment. The segments are split between two pages.

1 4

Table 362 - Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type a value for Ramp time, in minutes or units/minute, for the desired segments.
2 Click to select the current segment.
3 Type a value for Soak Time, in minutes, for the desired segments.
4 Type a value for Soak Value for the desired segments.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 489

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

Advanced Tab

Engineering

Table 363 - Engineering Tab Description

Item Description
1 Check to set for cyclic action.
Clear this checkbox to set for single action.
Cyclic action continuously repeats the ramp/soak profile.
Single action performs the ramp/ soak profile once and then stops.
2 Click to set ramp/Soak in Manual or Program Hold mode after initialization.
Clear this checkbox to have Ramp/Soak remain in its previous mode after initialization completes.
3 Click to reset program control values.
4 Click so that the RampValue parameter entered is in minutes.
Clear this checkbox if the RampValue parameter is entered in units/minute.
5 Click to set Guaranteed Ramp.
If set and the instruction is in Auto, ramping is temporarily suspended if the PV differs from the Output
by more than RampDeadband.
6 Click to clear the soak timer.
7 Type the number of ramp soak segments.
8 Type a value (Guaranteed Ramp Deadband) in engineering units that PV is allowed to differ from the
output when GuarRamp is on.
9 Type a value in engineering units that the PV is allowed to differ from the output when GuarSoak is on.

490 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

Trends Tab

The Trends tab shows trend charts of key device data over time. These faceplate
trends provide a quick view of current device performance to supplement, but
not replace, dedicated historical or live trend displays. For basic trends tab
functionality, See Trends Tab on page 29.

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications to diagnose device problems. This tab
includes device warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and predictive/
preventive maintenance data.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 491

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

Totalizer (TOT) The TOT instruction provides a time-scaled accumulation of an analog input
value.

Display Elements

A display element (global object) is created once and can be referenced

multiple times on multiple displays in an application. When changes are made
to the original (base) object, the instantiated copies (reference objects) are
automatically updated. Use of global objects, with tag structures in the
ControlLogix system, aid consistency and save engineering time.

Table 364 - TOT Display Element Description

Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_BuiltIn_TotalizerTgt Totalizer with target, horizontal
orientation - top

GO_BuiltIn_TotalizerTgt1 Totalizer with target, horizontal

orientation - bottom

GO_BuiltIn_TotalizerTgt2 Totalizer with target, vertical orientation

- right

GO_BuiltIn_TotalizerTgt3 Totalizer with target, vertical orientation

- left

GO_BuiltIn_Totalizer Totalizer, horizontal orientation - top

492 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

Table 364 - TOT Display Element Description

Display Element Name Display Element Description
GO_BuiltIn_Totalizer1 Totalizer, horizontal orientation - bottom

GO_BuiltIn_Totalizer2 Totalizer, vertical orientation - right

GO_BuiltIn_Totalizer3 Totalizer, vertical orientation - left

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 493

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

Operator Tab

The Faceplate initially opens to the Operator (Home) tab. From here, an
operator can monitor the device status and manually operate the device when it
is in Operator mode. Several features are common to all Add-On Instructions
faceplates. See Basic Faceplate Attributes on page 25.

7
1 8

6 10

Table 365 - Operator Tab Description

Item Description
1 Totalizer status
2 Flow indicator
3 Type the setpoint value for the totalizer input.
4 Type a value for the large deviation pre-target value of Total compared to Target.
This value is expressed as a deviation from the Target.
5 Type a value for the small deviation pre-target value of Total compared to Target.
This value is expressed as a deviation from the Target.
6 Click to reset Totalizer.
7 Large Deviation Pre-Target
8 Small Deviation Pre-Target
9 Click to stop Totalizer.
10 Click to start Totalizer.

494 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

Maintenance Tab

Maintenance personnel use the information and controls on the Maintenance

tab to adjust device parameters, troubleshoot, temporarily work around device
problems, and disable the device for routine maintenance. Several features are
common to all Add-On Instructions faceplates. See Basic Faceplate Attributes
on page 25

1
2

Table 366 - Maintenance Tab Description

Item Description
1 Type a value for the low input cutoff.
When the input is set at or below LowInCutoff, totalization stops.
2 Type a value for reset input.
3 Type a value for the setpoint.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 495

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

Advanced Tab

Engineering

Table 367 - Engineering Tab Description

Item Description
1 Click to select the timing execution mode.
2 Click to select the time base for the time base input.
3 Type a value for the multiplier of the incremental totalized value.

496 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

 Built-in Instructions Family Chapter 7

Trends Tab

The Trends tab shows trend charts of key device data over time. These faceplate
trends provide a quick view of current device performance to supplement, but
not replace, dedicated historical or live trend displays. For basic trends tab
functionality, See Trends Tab on page 29.

The trend tab is split into two pages.

Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018 497

Chapter 7 Built-in Instructions Family

Diagnostics Tab

The Diagnostic tab provides indications to diagnose device problems. This tab
includes device warnings and faults, warning and fault history, and predictive/
preventive maintenance data.

498 Rockwell Automation Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

.

Rockwell Automation Support

Use the following resources to access support information.

Technical Support Center Knowledgebase Articles, How-to Videos, FAQs, Chat, User https://rockwellautomation.custhelp.com/
Forums, and Product Notification Updates.
Local Technical Support Phone Numbers Locate the phone number for your country. http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/support/get-support-now.page
Find the Direct Dial Code for your product. Use the code to
Direct Dial Codes route your call directly to a technical support engineer. http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/support/direct-dial.page

Installation Instructions, Manuals, Brochures, and

Literature Library http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/literature-library/overview.page
Technical Data.
Product Compatibility and Download Get help determining how products interact, check
http://www.rockwellautomation.com/global/support/pcdc.page
Center (PCDC) features and capabilities, and find associated firmware.

Documentation Feedback
Your comments will help us serve your documentation needs better. If you have any suggestions on how to improve this document, complete the
How Are We Doing? form at http://literature.rockwellautomation.com/idc/groups/literature/documents/du/ra-du002_-en-e.pdf.

Rockwell Automation maintains current product environmental information on its website at http://www.rockwellautomation.com/rockwellautomation/about-us/sustainability-ethics/product-environmental-compliance.page.

Allen-Bradley, ControlLogix, DeviceLogix, E1 Plus, E300, FactoryTalk, PanelView, PlantPAx, PowerFlex, Rockwell Software, Rockwell Automation, SMC, and Studio 5000 Logix Designer are trademarks of Rockwell Automation, Inc.
Trademarks not belonging to Rockwell Automation are property of their respective companies.

Rockwell Otomasyon Ticaret A.Ş., Kar Plaza İş Merkezi E Blok Kat:6 34752 İçerenköy, İstanbul, Tel: +90 (216) 5698400

Publication PROCES-RM014A-EN-P - July 2018

Copyright © 2018 Rockwell Automation, Inc. All rights reserved. Printed in the U.S.A.